BA02105D/06/EN/01.22-00
71598576
2024-01-10

Products

Solutions

Services

Valid as of version
01.00.zz (Device firmware)

Operating Instructions
Proline Promag P 300
Electromagnetic flowmeter
PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

advanced physical layer
Keep cover

Sp a
nnu

ng

öff
ne

n

hile
tw
gh

ti

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available whenworking on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific toworking procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser Sales Center will supply you with current information and updates tothese instructions.

2

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Table of contents

Table of contents
1

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

6

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

1.1
1.2

6.1

1.4

Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.3 Communication-specific symbols . . . . . 6
1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.5 Symbols forcertain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.1 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

6.3

Mounting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.1.1 Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.1.2 Environment and process
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . . 26
Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 26
6.2.3 Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . 31
6.2.5 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . 32
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

7Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 11
2.7.3 Access via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.7.4 Access via service interface (CDIRJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

7.1
7.2

7.7
7.8

Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7.2.2 Requirements for connecting cable . . . 34
7.2.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.2.4 Available device plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.2.5 device plug pin assignment . . . . . . . . 37
7.2.6 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 37
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 38
7.3.1 Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . 38
7.3.2 Connecting the remote display andoperating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . 41
Ensuring potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.4.2 Connection examples for standard
situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7.4.3 Connection example with thepotential of medium not equal toprotective ground without the"Floating measurement" option . . . . . . 43
7.4.4 Connection examples with thepotential of medium not equal toprotective ground with the "Floating
measurement" option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
7.5.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7.6.1 Setting the device name . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7.6.2 Activating the default IP address . . . . 49
Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 50
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

8Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

8.1
8.2

Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . .
8.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3

3

Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

3.1

Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

4.1
4.2

Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device . . . . . . 17

5

Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

5.1
5.2

Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting
lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs . . 19
5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift . . . . . . . . 19
Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

5.3

Endress+Hauser

6.2

7.3

7.4

7.5
7.6

52
53
53
54

3

Table of contents

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

8.3

10.5.410.5.510.5.610.5.7
10.5.810.5.98.4

8.5

Access to the operating menu via the local
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 61
8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list . . . 63
8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 63
8.3.8 Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.3.9 Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 64
8.3.10 User roles and related accessauthorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.3.11 Disabling write protection via accesscode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Access to operating menu via Web browser . . 67
8.4.1 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL . . . . . . 67
8.4.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.4.3 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . 69
8.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 73
8.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Access to the operating menu via theoperating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 74
8.5.2 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
8.5.3 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
8.5.4 SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

9

System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

9.1

9.4

Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 80
9.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 80
9.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Device master file (GSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9.2.1 File name of the manufacturerspecific device master file (GSD) . . . . . 81
9.2.2 File name of the PA Profile device
master file (GSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9.3.1 Overview of the modules . . . . . . . . . . 82
9.3.2 Description of the modules . . . . . . . . 82
9.3.3 Status coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
9.3.4 Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
System redundancy S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

10Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

9.2

9.3

10.1 Post-installation and post-connection check . . 91
10.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 91
10.3 Connecting via FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.4 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.5 Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 92
10.5.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.5.2 Displaying the communicationinterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.5.3 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . . 95
4

Configuration of the Analog Inputs . . 98
Displaying the I/O configuration . . . . 99
Configuring the current input . . . . . . 99
Configuring the status input . . . . . . 101
Configuring the current output . . . . 101
Configuring the pulse/frequency/
switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
10.5.10 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . 110
10.5.11 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . 112
10.5.12 Configuring empty pipe detection . . 113
10.5.13 Configuring flow damping . . . . . . . . 114
10.5.14 "Build-up index adjustment" wizard . 115
10.6 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
10.6.1 Using the parameter to enter theaccess code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10.6.2 Carrying out a sensor adjustment . . . 118
10.6.3 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . 118
10.6.4 Carrying out additional display
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10.6.5 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
10.6.6 Performing electrode cleaning . . . . . 125
10.6.7 Performing Heartbeat basic setup . . 126
10.6.8 Configuration management . . . . . . . 127
10.6.9 Using parameters for device
administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10.7 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10.8 Protecting settings from unauthorized access 132
10.8.1 Write protection via access code . . . 132
10.8.2 Write protection via write protection
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

11

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

11.1 Reading off the device locking status . . . . . . 135
11.2 Adjusting the operating language . . . . . . . . . 135
11.3 Configuring the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
11.4 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
11.4.1 "Process variables" submenu . . . . . . . 136
11.4.2 Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
11.4.3 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 138
11.4.4 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
11.6 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
11.6.1 Function scope of "Control Totalizer"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all
totalizers" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
11.7 Show data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

12

Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 145

12.1
12.2

General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Diagnostic information via light emitting
diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
12.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
12.3 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 149
12.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 151

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

12.4

Diagnostic information in the Web browser . 151
12.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 152
12.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 153
12.6 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 154
12.6.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 154
12.7 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 155
12.7.1 Diagnostic of sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.7.2 Diagnostic of electronic . . . . . . . . . . 157
12.7.3 Diagnostic of configuration . . . . . . . 164
12.7.4 Diagnostic of process . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
12.8 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
12.9 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
12.10 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
12.10.1 Reading out the event logbook . . . . . 175
12.10.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 176
12.10.3 Overview of information events . . . . 176
12.11 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 178
12.11.1 Function scope of "Device reset"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
12.12 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
12.13 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

13

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

13.1
13.2
13.3

Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
13.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
13.1.2 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

14

Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Table of contents

16.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
16.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
16.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
16.7 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
16.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
16.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
16.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
16.11 Operability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
16.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
16.13 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
16.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
16.15 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

14.1

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 182
14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 182
14.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
14.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
14.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
14.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 183
14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 183

15

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

15.1

Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
15.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
15.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
15.2 Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 185
15.3 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
15.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

16

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

16.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
16.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
16.3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Endress+Hauser

5About this document

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

1

About this document

1.1

Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information required in the various life cycle
phases of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and storage, toinstallation, connection, operation and commissioning, through to troubleshooting,
maintenance and disposal.

1.2

Symbols

1.2.1

Safety symbols

DANGER

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result inserious or fatal injury.
WARNING

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result inserious or fatal injury.
CAUTION

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result inminor or medium injury.
NOTICE

This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result inpersonal injury.

1.2.2

Electrical symbols
SymbolMeaning
Direct current
Alternating current
Direct current and alternating current
Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via agrounding system.
Potential equalization connection (PE: protective earth)Ground terminals that must be connected to ground prior to establishing any otherconnections.
The ground terminals are located on the interior and exterior of the device:• Interior ground terminal: potential equalization is connected to the supply network.
• Exterior ground terminal: device is connected to the plant grounding system.

1.2.3

Communication-specific symbols
SymbolMeaning
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
Communication via a wireless, local network.
LED
Light emitting diode is off.

6

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

SymbolAbout this document

Meaning
LED
Light emitting diode is on.
LED
Light emitting diode is flashing.

1.2.4

Tool symbols
SymbolMeaning
Flat-blade screwdriver
Allen key
Open-ended wrench

1.2.5

Symbols for certain types of information
SymbolMeaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
Reference to documentation
Reference to pageA

Reference to graphic
Notice or individual step to be observed
1. , 2. , 3. …

Series of steps
Result of a step
Help in the event of a problem
Visual inspection

1.2.6

Symbols in graphics
SymbolMeaning

1, 2, 3, ...

Item numbers

1. , 2. , 3. , …

Series of steps

A, B, C, ...

Views

A-A, B-B, C-C, ...

Sections

Endress+Hauser

Hazardous area

7

About this document

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Symbol.

Meaning
Safe area (non-hazardous area)
Flow direction

1.3

Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number from thenameplate• Endress+Hauser Operations app: Enter serial number from nameplate or scanmatrix code on nameplate.

1.3.1

Document function

The following documentation may be available depending on the version ordered:
Document type

Purpose and content of the document

Technical Information (TI)

Planning aid for your device
The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides
an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered forthe device.

Brief Operating Instructions (KA)

Guide that takes you quickly to the 1st measured value
The Brief Operating Instructions contain all the essential informationfrom incoming acceptance to initial commissioning.

Operating Instructions (BA)Your reference document
The Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in
the various phases of the life cycle of the device: from productidentification, incoming acceptance and storage, to mounting,connection, operation and commissioning through to troubleshooting,
maintenance and disposal.

Description of Device Parameters(GP)

Reference for your parameters
The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual
parameter. The description is aimed at those who work with the device
over the entire life cycle and perform specific configurations.

Safety Instructions (XA)

Depending on the approval, safety instructions for electrical equipment inhazardous areas are also supplied with the device. The Safety Instructions
are an integral part of the Operating Instructions.
Information on the Safety Instructions (XA) relevant to the device is provided
on the nameplate.

Supplementary device-dependent
documentation (SD/FY)

1.4

Always comply strictly with the instructions in the relevant
supplementary documentation. The supplementary documentation is an
integral part of the device documentation.

Registered trademarks

Ethernet-APL™
Registered trademark of the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V. (PROFIBUS User
Organization), Karlsruhe, Germany

8

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

2

Safety instructions

2.1

Requirements for the personnel

Safety instructions

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator.
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations.
‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual andsupplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on theapplication).
‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility'sowner-operator.

‣ Follow the instructions in this manual.

2.2

Intended use

Application and media
The measuring device described in this manual is intended only for the flow measurementof liquids with a minimum conductivity of 5 µS/cm.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications or where there is anincreased risk due to process pressure, are labeled accordingly on the nameplate.
To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.
‣ Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate andthe general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary
documentation.
‣ Based on the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for theintended use in the hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety).
‣ Use the measuring device only for media to which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
‣ If the ambient temperature of the measuring device is outside the atmospherictemperature, it is absolutely essential to comply with the relevant basic conditions as
specified in the device documentation →  8.
‣ Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.
Incorrect use
Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
caused by improper or non-intended use.

LWARNING
Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids and ambient conditions!
‣ Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material.
‣ Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process.
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.

Endress+Hauser

9Safety instructions

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

NOTICE
Verification for borderline cases:‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistancein verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any
warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level ofcontamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties.
Residual risks

LCAUTION
The electronics and the medium may cause the surfaces to heat up or freeze. Risk ofburns or frostbite!
‣ Mount suitable touch protection.

2.3

Workplace safety

When working on and with the device:‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment as per national regulations.

2.4

Operational safety

Damage to the device!

‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for the interference-free operation of the device.
Modifications to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers!
‣ If modifications are nevertheless required, consult with the manufacturer.
RepairTo ensure continued operational safety and reliability:‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to the repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use only original spare parts and accessories.

2.5

Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meetstate-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition inwhich it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. The manufacturer
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device..

2.6

IT security

Our warranty is valid only if the product is installed and used as described in the Operating
Instructions. The product is equipped with security mechanisms to protect it against any
inadvertent changes to the settings.
IT security measures, which provide additional protection for the product and associateddata transfer, must be implemented by the operators themselves in line with their security
standards.

10

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

2.7

Safety instructions

Device-specific IT security

The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on theoperator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater inoperation safety if used correctly. The following list provides an overview of the mostimportant functions:
Function/interface

Factory setting

Recommendation

Write protection via hardware write
protection switch →  11

Not enabled

On an individual basis following risk assessment

Access code(also applies for Web server login or
FieldCare connection) →  11

Not enabled(0000)

Assign a customized access code duringcommissioning

WLAN(order option in display module)

EnabledOn an individual basis following risk assessment

WLAN security mode

Enabled (WPA2PSK)Do not change

WLAN passphrase(password) →  12

Serial number

Assign a customized WLAN passphrase duringcommissioning

WLAN mode

Access point

On an individual basis following risk assessment

Web server →  12

EnabledOn an individual basis following risk assessment

CDI-RJ45 service interface →  12–

On an individual basis following risk assessment

2.7.1

Protecting access via hardware write protection

Write access to the parameters of the device via the local display, web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch(DIP switch on the main electronics module). When hardware write protection is enabled,
only read access to the parameters is possible.
Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered →  134.

2.7.2

Protecting access via a password

Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or accessto the device via the WLAN interface.
• User-specific access code
Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Access authorization is clearly regulated
through the use of a user-specific access code.
• WLAN passphrase
The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook ortablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option.
• Infrastructure mode
When the device is operated in infrastructure mode, the WLAN passphrase corresponds
to the WLAN passphrase configured on the operator side.
User-specific access code
Write access to the device parameters via the local display, web browser or operating tool(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code(→  132).
When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to0000 (open).

Endress+Hauser

11

Safety instructions

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

WLAN passphrase: Operation as WLAN access point
A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the
WLAN interface (→  75), which can be ordered as an optional extra, is protected by
the network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with theIEEE 802.11 standard.
When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It
can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter(→  124).
Infrastructure mode
A connection between the device and WLAN access point is protected by means of an SSID
and passphrase on the system side. Please contact the relevant system administrator foraccess.
General notes on the use of passwords• The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed duringcommissioning.
• Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing
the access code or network key.
• The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code andnetwork key.
• For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose thepassword, for example, see the "Write protection via access code" section →  132

2.7.3

Access via Web server

The device can be operated and configured via a Web browser with the integrated Web
server. The connection is via the service interface (CDI-RJ45), signal transmission
connection for PROFINET with Ethernet-APL (IO1) or the WLAN interface.
The Web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The Web server can be disabled if
necessary (e.g. after commissioning) via the Web server functionality parameter.
The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents
unauthorized access to the information.
For detailed information on device parameters, see:"Description of Device Parameters" document →  216.

2.7.4

Access via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

The device can be connected to a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Devicespecific functions guarantee the secure operation of the device in a network.
The use of relevant industrial standards and guidelines that have been defined by national
and international safety committees, such as IEC/ISA62443 or the IEEE, is recommended.
This includes organizational security measures such as the assignment of accessauthorization as well as technical measures such as network segmentation.
Transmitters with an Ex de approval may not be connected via the service interface(CDI-RJ45)!
Order code for "Approval transmitter + sensor", options (Ex de): BA, BB, C1, C2, GA,
GB, MA, MB, NA, NB

12Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

3

Product description

Product description

The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.

3.1

Product design
2

1

4

3

un
ter

n
f ne
öf

Ni
Spcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngr
er t op öffn
Ne gizeso pa den when
us s outens vr en
ionir

i sp

la y

e

D

Nicht

I/O

ar
ES

C

–
+
E

5
A0029586

1
1
2
3
4
5

Endress+Hauser

Important components of a measuring device
Connection compartment cover
Display module
Transmitter housing
Electronics compartment coverSensor13

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification

4.1

Incoming acceptance
Are the order codes on thedelivery note (1) and the
product sticker (2) identical?

1
2

1
2

Are the goods undamaged?

Do the data on the
nameplate match theordering information on thedelivery note?

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

i

i

Date:

Is the envelope present withaccompanying documents?

• If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
• The Technical Documentation is available via the Internet or via the Endress+Hauser
Operations App, see the "Product identification" section →  15.

4.2

Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the device:• Nameplate specifications• Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter the serial numbers from the nameplates in the Device Viewer(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): all the information about the device is displayed.
• Enter the serial numbers from the nameplates into the Endress+Hauser Operations App
or scan the DataMatrix code on the nameplate with the Endress+Hauser Operations App:
all the information about the device is displayed.

14

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Incoming acceptance and product identification

For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• The chapters "Additional standard documentation on the device" and "Supplementarydevice-dependent documentation"• The Device Viewer: Enter the serial number from the nameplate(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the DataMatrix code on the nameplate.

4.2.1

Transmitter nameplate
1 2

3 4 5

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

20

6

19
7
18
17
16
15
14

8
i

i

Date:

13

12

11

9

10
A0029192

2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Endress+Hauser

Example of a transmitter nameplate
Place of manufacture
Name of the transmitter
Order code
Serial number (Ser. no.)Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
Degree of protection
Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas
Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs
2-D matrix code
Date of manufacture: year-month
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, RCM tick
Space for degree of protection of connection and electronics compartment when used in hazardous areas
Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev.Rev.) from the factory
Space for additional information in the case of special products
Permitted temperature range for cable
Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)Information on cable gland
Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage
Electrical connection data: supply voltage

15

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4.2.2

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Sensor nameplate
1

2
3
4
5

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

6

7
13
8

i

i

9

Date:

12

11

10
A0029205

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Example of sensor nameplate
Name of the sensor
Place of manufacture
Order code
Serial number (Ser. no.)Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
Flow; nominal diameter of the sensor; pressure rating; nominal pressure; system pressure; medium
temperature range; material of liner and electrodes
Approval information for explosion protection, Pressure Equipment Directive and degree of protection
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
2-D matrix code
Date of manufacture: year-month
Flow direction
CE mark, RCM-Tick markPermitted ambient temperature (Ta)

Order code
The measuring device is reordered using the order code.
Extended order code
• The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) arealways listed.
• Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approvalrelated specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are alsoordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#).
• If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related
specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE+).

16

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

4.2.3
SymbolIncoming acceptance and product identification

Symbols on measuring device
MeaningWARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious
or fatal injury. To determine the nature of the potential hazard and the measures required to
avoid it, consult the documentation accompanying the measuring device.
Reference to documentation
Refers to the corresponding device documentation.
Protective ground connection
A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections.

Endress+Hauser

17

Storage and transport

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

5

Storage and transport

5.1

Storage conditions

Observe the following notes for storage:‣ Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock.
‣ Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections.
They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring pipe.
‣ Protect from direct sunlight to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
‣ Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus and bacteria infestation can damage the liner.
‣ Store in a dry and dust-free place.
‣ Do not store outdoors.
Storage temperature →  200

5.2

Transporting the productTransport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging.

A0029252

Do not remove protective covers or caps installed on process connections. They
prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring tube.

5.2.1

Measuring devices without lifting lugs

LWARNING
Center of gravity of the measuring device is higher than the suspension points of the
webbing slings.
Risk of injury if the measuring device slips.
‣ Secure the measuring device against slipping or turning.
‣ Observe the weight specified on the packaging (stick-on label).

A0029214

18

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

5.2.2

Mounting

Measuring devices with lifting lugs

LCAUTION
Special transportation instructions for devices with lifting lugs
‣ Only use the lifting lugs fitted on the device or flanges to transport the device.
‣ The device must always be secured at two lifting lugs at least.

5.2.3

Transporting with a fork lift

If transporting in wood crates, the floor structure enables the crates to be lifted lengthwise
or at both sides using a forklift.

LCAUTION
Risk of damaging the magnetic coil
‣ If transporting by forklift, do not lift the sensor by the metal casing.
‣ This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.

A0029319

5.3

Packaging disposal

All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100 % recyclable:• Outer packaging of device
Polymer stretch wrap, complying with EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS)• Packaging• Wooden crate treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, confirmed by IPPC logo
• Cardboard box in accordance with European packaging guideline 94/62EC,
recyclability confirmed by Resy symbol• Carrying and securing materials• Disposable plastic pallet• Plastic straps• Plastic adhesive strips• Filler material
Paper pads

6

Mounting

6.1

Mounting requirements

6.1.1

Mounting position

Mounting location• Do not install the device at the highest point of the pipe.
• Do not install the device upstream from a free pipe outlet in a down pipe.

Endress+Hauser

19

Mounting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

A0042131

The device should ideally be installed in an ascending pipe.

A0042317

Installation near valves
Install the device in the direction of flow upstream from the valve.

A0041091

Installation upstream from a down pipe
NOTICE
Negative pressure in the measuring pipe can damage the liner!
‣ If installing upstream of down pipes whose length h ≥ 5 m (16.4 ft): install a siphon
with a vent valve downstream of the device.
This arrangement prevents the flow of liquid stopping in the pipe and air
entrainment.
1h2

A0028981

1
2
h

20

Vent valve
Pipe siphon
Length of down pipe

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Mounting

Installation with partially filled pipes• Partially filled pipes with a gradient require a drain-type configuration.
• The installation of a cleaning valve is recommended.

N

³2
³5

xD

xD

N

A0041088

Installation near pumps
NOTICE
Negative pressure in the measuring pipe can damage the liner!
‣ In order to maintain the system pressure, install the device in the flow direction
downstream from the pump.
‣ Install pulsation dampers if reciprocating, diaphragm or peristaltic pumps are used.

A0041083• Information on the liner's resistance to partial vacuum• Information on the measuring system's resistance to vibration and shock →  201
Installation of very heavy devices
Support required for nominal diameters of DN ≥ 350 mm (14 in).
NOTICE
Damage to the device!
If incorrect support is provided, the sensor housing could buckle and the internal magnetic
coils could be damaged.
‣ Only provide supports at the pipe flanges.

A0041087

Installation in event of pipe vibrations
A remote version is recommended in the event of strong pipe vibrations.
Endress+Hauser

21

Mounting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

NOTICE
Pipe vibrations can damage the device!
‣ Do not expose the device to strong vibrations.
‣ Support the pipe and fix it in place.
‣ Support the device and fix it in place.
‣ Mount the sensor and transmitter separately.

L > 10 m (33 ft)

A0041092

Information on the measuring system's resistance to vibration and shock →  201
Orientation
The direction of the arrow on the sensor nameplate helps you to install the sensor
according to the flow direction (direction of medium flow through the piping).
Orientation

Recommendation

Vertical orientation

A0015591

1)

Horizontal orientation, transmitter at top

A0015589

2) 3)

Horizontal orientation, transmitter atbottom4)

A0015590

Horizontal orientation, transmitter atside
A0015592

1)
2)
3)
4)

22

Applications with low process temperatures may reduce the ambient temperature. To maintain theminimum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
Applications with high process temperatures may increase the ambient temperature. To maintain the
maximum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
To prevent the electronics from overheating in the event of strong heat formation (e.g. CIP or SIP cleaning
process), install the device with the transmitter part pointing downwards.
When the empty pipe detection function is switched on, empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter
housing is pointing upwards.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Mounting

VerticalOptimum for self-emptying pipe systems and for use in conjunction with empty pipe
detection.

A0015591

Horizontal• Ideally, the measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief
insulation of the measuring electrodes by entrained air bubbles.
• Empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter housing is pointing upwards asotherwise there is no guarantee that the empty pipe detection function will actually
respond to a partially filled or empty measuring tube.
1
2

2
3
A0029344

1
2
3

EPD electrode for empty pipe detection
Measuring electrodes for signal detection
Reference electrode for potential equalization

Measuring devices with tantalum or platinum electrodes can be ordered without an
EPD electrode. In this case, empty pipe detection is performed via the measuring
electrodes.
Inlet and outlet runs
Installation with inlet and outlet runs
Installation with elbows, pumps or valves
To avoid a vacuum and to maintain the specified level of accuracy, if possible install thedevice upstream from assemblies that produce turbulence (e.g. valves, T-sections) anddownstream from pumps.
Maintain straight, unimpeded inlet and outlet runs.
≥ 5 × DN

≥ 2 × DN

A0028997

Endress+Hauser

23

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL≥ 2 × DN

Mounting

A0042132

Installation without inlet and outlet runs
Depending on the device design and installation location, the inlet and outlet runs can be
reduced or omitted entirely.
Devices and possible order options on request.
Maximum measured error
When the device is installed with the inlet and outlet runs described, a maximum
measured error of ±0.5 % of the reading ±1 mm/s (0.04 in/s) can be guaranteed.
Installation before or after bends
Installation without inlet and outlet runs is possible.
≥ 0 × DN

Installation downstream of pumps
Installation without inlet and outlet runs is possible.
Installation upstream of valves
Installation without inlet and outlet runs is possible.
Installation downstream of valves
Installation without inlet and outlet runs is possible if the valve is 100% open during
operation.
Dimensions
For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section .

6.1.2

Environment and process requirements

Ambient temperature range

24

Transmitter

Standard: –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)

Local display–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F), the readability of the display may be
impaired at temperatures outside the temperature range.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Mounting

Sensor• Process connection material, carbon steel:–10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)• Process connection material, stainless steel:–40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)

Liner

Do not exceed or fall below the permitted temperature range of the liner .

If operating outdoors:• Install the measuring device in a shady location.
• Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
• Avoid direct exposure to weather conditions.
System pressure
Installation near pumps →  21
Vibrations
Installation in event of pipe vibrations →  21
Thermal insulation
If process fluids are very hot, it is necessary to insulate pipes in order to reduce energy loss
and to prevent individuals from accidentally coming into contact with hot pipes. Pleaseobserve the applicable standards and guidelines for insulating pipes.
A housing support/an extended neck is used for heat dissipation:• Devices with the order code for "Lining", option B "PFA high-temperature" always
come with a housing support.
• In the case of all other devices, a housing support can be ordered via the order codefor "Sensor option", option CG "Sensor extended neck".

LWARNING
Electronics overheating on account of thermal insulation!
‣ The housing support is used for heat dissipation and must be completely free (i.e.
uncovered). At the very maximum, the sensor insulation may extend as far as theupper edge of the two sensor half-shells.

max.

A0031216

Adapters
Suitable adapters to DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers) can be used to install the sensor
in larger-diameter pipes. The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring
accuracy with very slow-moving fluids. The nomogram shown here can be used to
calculate the pressure loss caused by reducers and expanders.
The nomogram only applies to liquids with a viscosity similar to that of water.
1.

Endress+Hauser

Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D.

25

Mounting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

2.

From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity(downstream from the reduction) and the d/D ratio.
100 [mbar]
8 m/s
7 m/s
6 m/s
5 m/s
4 m/s

10

3 m/s

max. 8°

2 m/s

d

D
1 m/s

1

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

d/D
A0029002

6.1.3

Special mounting instructions

Weather protection cover
280 (11.0)

255 (10.0)

134 (5.3)

12 (0.47)

30 (1.18)

48 (1.9)

146 (5.75)

A0029553

4

Engineering unit mm (in)6.2

Mounting the measuring device

6.2.1

Required tools

For sensor
For flanges and other process connections: use a suitable mounting tool

6.2.2

26

Preparing the measuring device

1.

Remove all remaining transport packaging.

2.

Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor.

3.

Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover.
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

6.2.3

Mounting

Mounting the sensor

LWARNING
Danger due to improper process sealing!
‣ Ensure that the inside diameters of the gaskets are greater than or equal to that of theprocess connections and piping.
Ensurethat the seals are clean and undamaged.
‣
Securetheseals correctly.
‣
1.

Ensure that the direction of the arrow on the sensor matches the flow direction of
the medium.

2.

To ensure compliance with device specifications, install the measuring device
between the pipe flanges in a way that it is centered in the measurement section.

3.

If using ground disks, comply with the Installation Instructions provided.

4.

Observe the necessary screw tightening torques →  27.

5.

Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries
do not point upwards.
A0029263

Mounting the seals

LCAUTION
An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube!
Risk of measuring signal short circuit.
‣ Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite.
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
1.

For DIN flanges: only use seals according to DIN EN 1514-1.

2.

For a "PFA" liner: additional seals are generally not required.

3.

For a "PTFE" liner: additional seals are generally not required.

Mounting the ground cable/ground disks
Comply with the information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions
for the use of ground cables/ground disks .
Screw tightening torques
Please note the following:• The screw tightening torques listed below apply only to lubricated threads and to pipes
not subjected to tensile stress.
• Tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing surface or damage the seal.
Nominal screw tightening torques →  30

Endress+Hauser

27

Mounting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Maximum screw tightening torques
Maximum screw tightening torques for EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
NominaldiameterPressure rating

ScrewsFlange thickness

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

15

PN 40

4 × M12

16

11

–

25

PN 40

4 × M12

18

26

20

32

PN 40

4 × M16

18

41

35

40

PN 40

4 × M16

18

52

47

50

PN 40

4 × M16

20

65

59

1)

PN 16

8 × M16

18

43

40

65

PN 40

8 × M16

22

43

40

80

PN 16

8 × M16

20

53

48

80

PN 40

8 × M16

24

53

48

100

PN 16

8 × M16

20

57

51

100

PN 40

8 × M20

24

78

70

125

PN 16

8 × M16

22

75

67

125

PN 40

8 × M24

26

111

99

150

PN 16

8 × M20

22

99

85

150

PN 40

8 × M24

28

136

120

200

PN 10

8 × M20

24

141

101

200

PN 16

12 × M20

24

94

67

200

PN 25

12 × M24

30

138

105

250

PN 10

12 × M20

26

110

–

250

PN 16

12 × M24

26

131

–

250

PN 25

12 × M27

32

200

–

300

PN 10

12 × M20

26

125

–

300

PN 16

12 × M24

28

179

–

300

PN 25

16 × M27

34

204

–

350

PN 10

16 × M20

26

188

–

350

PN 16

16 × M24

30

254

–

350

PN 25

16 × M30

38

380

–

400

PN 10

16 × M24

26

260

–

400

PN 16

16 × M27

32

330

–

400

PN 25

16 × M33

40

488

–

450

PN 10

20 × M24

28

235

–

450

PN 16

20 × M27

40

300

–

450

PN 25

20 × M33

46

385

–

500

PN 10

20 × M24

28

265

–

500

PN 16

20 × M30

34

448

–

500

PN 25

20 × M33

48

533

–

600

PN 10

20 × M27

28

345

–

65

28

Max. screw tightening torque[Nm]Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

1)

Mounting

NominaldiameterPressure rating

ScrewsFlange thickness

Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

600

PN 16

20 × M33

36

658

–

600

PN 25

20 × M36

58

731

–

Sizing as per EN 1092-1 (not DIN 2501)

Screw tightening torques for ASME B16.5, Class 150/300
Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

ScrewsMax. screw tightening torque [Nm]([lbf · ft])

[mm]

[in]

[psi]

[in]

PTFE

PFA

15

½

Class 150

4×½

6 (4)

– (–)

15

½

Class 300

4×½

6 (4)

– (–)

25

1

Class 150

4×½

11 (8)

10 (7)

25

1

Class 300

4 × 5/8

14 (10)12 (9)

40

1½

Class 150

4×½

24 (18)21 (15)40

1½

Class 300

4×¾

34 (25)31 (23)50

2Class 150

4 × 5/8

47 (35)44 (32)50

2Class 300

8 × 5/8

23 (17)22 (16)80

3Class 150

4 × 5/8

79 (58)67 (49)80

3Class 300

8×¾

47 (35)42 (31)100

4Class 150

8 × 5/8

56 (41)50 (37)100

4Class 300

8×¾

67 (49)59 (44)150

6Class 150

8×¾

106 (78)

86 (63)150

6Class 300

12 × ¾

73 (54)67 (49)200

8Class 150

8×¾

143 (105)109 (80)250

10Class 150

12 × 7/8

135 (100)

– (–)

300

12

Class 150

12 × 7/8

178 (131)

– (–)

350

14

Class 150

12 × 1260 (192)

– (–)

400

16

Class 150

16 × 1246 (181)

– (–)

450

18

Class 150

16 × 1 1/8

371 (274)

– (–)

500

20

Class 150

20 × 1 1/8

341 (252)

– (–)

600

24

Class 150

20 × 1 ¼

477 (352)– (–)

Maximum screw tightening torques for JIS B2220
Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

Screws

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

25

10K

4 × M16

32

27

20K

4 × M16

32

27

10K

4 × M16

38

–

20K

4 × M16

38

–

10K

4 × M16

41

37

20K

4 × M16

41

37

10K

4 × M16

54

46

32

40

50

Endress+Hauser

Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]29

Mounting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

Screws

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

20K

8 × M16

27

23

10K

4 × M16

74

63

20K

8 × M16

37

31

10K

8 × M16

38

32

20K

8 × M20

57

46

10K

8 × M16

47

38

20K

8 × M20

75

58

10K

8 × M20

80

66

20K

8 × M22

121

103

10K

8 × M20

99

81

20K

12 × M22

108

72

10K

12 × M20

82

54

20K

12 × M22

121

88

10K

12 × M22

133

–

20K

12 × M24

212

–

10K

16 × M22

99

–

20K

16 × M24

183

–

65

80

100

125

150

200

250

300

Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]Screw tightening torques for AS 2129, Table E
Nominal diameterScrewsMax. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

25

4 × M122150

4 × M16

42

Screw tightening torques for AS 4087, PN 16
Nominal diameterScrewsMax. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

50

4 × M16

42

Nominal screw tightening torques
Nominal screw tightening torques for JIS B2220
Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

Screws

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

HG

PUR

350

10K

16 × M22

109

109

20K

16 × M30×3

217

217

10K

16 × M24

163

163

20K

16 × M30×3

258

258

10K

16 × M24

155

155

20K

16 × M30×3

272

272

400

450

30

Nom. screw tightening torque [Nm]Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Mounting

Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

Screws

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

HG

PUR

500

10K

16 × M24

183

183

20K

16 × M30×3

315

315

10K

16 × M30

235

235

20K

16 × M36×3

381

381

700

10K

16 × M30

300

300

750

10K

16 × M30

339

339

600

6.2.4

Nom. screw tightening torque [Nm]Turning the transmitter housing

To provide easier access to the connection compartment or display module, the transmitter
housing can be turned.

4.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
te r

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

ES

C

+

+

E

ar

3 mm

1.

ar

e

e

E

2.

C

–

–

4 mm 7 Nm (5.2 lbf ft) 3.
A0029993

5

Endress+Hauser

Non-Ex housing1.

Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Loosen the securing screw.

4.

Turn the housing to the desired position.

5.

Tighten the securing screw.

6.

Screw on the connection compartment cover.

7.

Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

31

Mounting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

2.

A

1.

4 mm 7 Nm (5.2 lbf !)3.

AA0043150

6

Ex housing

1.

Loosen the fixing screws.

2.

Turn the housing to the desired position.

3.

Tighten the securing screws.

6.2.5

Turning the display module

The display module can be turned to optimize display readability and operability.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
te r

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

ES

C

C

–

–

+

+

ES

C

E

–

E

ar

e

E

ar

2.

3 mm

1.

e

+

3.
A0030035

32

1.

Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Turn the display module to the desired position: max. 8 × 45° in each direction.

4.

Screw on the connection compartment cover.

5.

Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

6.3

Mounting

Post-installation check

Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)?



Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications?
For example:• Process temperature• Process pressure (refer to the section on "Pressure-temperature ratings" in the "Technical
Information" document )• Ambient temperature• Measuring range

Has the correct orientation been selected for the sensor →  22 ?
• According to sensor type
• According to medium temperature• According to medium properties (outgassing, with entrained solids)

Endress+Hauser



Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the actual direction of flow of the fluid throughthe piping →  22?

Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)?

Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight?

Have the fixing screws been tightened with the correct tightening torque?



33

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

7

Electrical connection

LWARNING
Live parts! Incorrect work performed on the electrical connections can result in anelectric shock.
‣ Set up a disconnecting device (switch or power-circuit breaker) to easily disconnect thedevice from the supply voltage.
‣ In addition to the device fuse, include an overcurrent protection unit with max. 10 A in
the plant installation.

7.1

Electrical safety

In accordance with applicable national regulations.

7.2

Connecting requirements

7.2.1

Required tools• For cable entries: Use corresponding tools• For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm
• Wire stripper• When using stranded cables: Crimper for wire end ferrule• For removing cables from terminal: Flat blade screwdriver ≤ 3 mm (0.12 in)

7.2.2

Requirements for connecting cable

The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements.
Protective grounding cable for the outer ground terminal
Conductor cross-section < 2.1 mm2 (14 AWG)
The use of a cable lug enables the connection of larger cross-sections.
The grounding impedance must be less than 2 Ω.
Permitted temperature range• The installation guidelines that apply in the country of installation must be observed.
• The cables must be suitable for the minimum and maximum temperatures to be
expected.
Power supply cable (incl. conductor for the inner ground terminal)
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Signal cable
PROFINET with Ethernet-APL
The reference cable type for APL segments is fieldbus cable type A, MAU type 1 and 3(specified in IEC 61158-2). This cable meets the requirements for intrinsically safe
applications according to IEC TS 60079-47 and can also be used in non-intrinsically safe
applications.

34

Cable typeA

Cable capacitance

45 to 200 nF/km

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Electrical connection

Loop resistance

15 to 150 Ω/km

Cable inductance

0.4 to 1 mH/km

Further details are provided in the Ethernet-APL Engineering Guideline(https://www.ethernet-apl.org).
Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient
Pulse /frequency /switch output
Standard installation cable is sufficient
Relay output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient
Status inputStandard installation cable is sufficient
Cable diameter• Cable glands supplied:
M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).
Requirements for connecting cable – remote display and operating module DKX001
Optionally available connecting cable
A cable is supplied depending on the order option• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option Oor• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option M
and• Order code for DKX001: order code 040 for "Cable", option A, B, D, E

Endress+HauserStandard cable2 × 2 × 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) PVC cable with common shield (2 pairs, pairstranded)

Flame resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60332-1-2

Oil resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60811-2-1

ShieldTin-plated copper braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Capacitance: core/shield≤ 200 pF/m

L/R

≤ 24 µH/Ω

Available cable length

5 m (15 ft)/10 m (35 ft)/20 m (65 ft)/30 m (100 ft)

Operating temperature

When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable
can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F)

35Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Standard cable - customer-specific cableWith the following order option, no cable is supplied with the device and must be provided
by the customer:
Order code for DKX001: Order code 040 for "Cable", option 1 "None, provided by customer,
max 300 m"
A standard cable with the following minimum requirements can be used as the connecting
cable, even in the hazardous area (Zone 2, Class I, Division 2 and Zone 1, Class I, Division
1):36Standard cable

4 wires (2 pairs); pair-stranded with common shield, minimum wire cross-section
0.34 mm2 (22 AWG)

ShieldTin-plated copper braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Cable impedance (pair)

Minimum 80 Ω

Cable length

Maximum 300 m (1 000 ft), maximum loop impedance 20 Ω

Capacitance: core/shield

Maximum 1 000 nF for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

L/R

Maximum 24 µH/Ω for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

7.2.3

Electrical connection

Terminal assignment

Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs
The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual orderversion of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on anadhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage
1 (+)

Input/output 1

2 (–)

26 (+)

Input/output 2

27 (–)

24 (+)

Input/output 3

25 (–)

22 (+)

23 (–)

Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label in terminal cover.

Terminal assignment of the remote display and operating module →  41.

7.2.4

Available device plugs

Device plugs may not be used in hazardous areas!
Order code for "Input; output 1", option RB "PROFINET with Ethernet-APL"
Order code

Cable entry/connection"Electrical connection"

2

3

L, N, P, U

M12 plug × 1

–

7.2.5

device plug pin assignment
Pin

Assignment

CodingPlug/socket

3

4

1

APL signal -A

Socket2

1

2

APL signal +3

Cable shield1

4

Not assigned

Metal plughousing

Cable shield
1If a cable shield is used

7.2.6

Preparing the measuring device

NOTICE
Insufficient sealing of the housing!
Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised.
‣ Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Remove dummy plug if present.

2.

If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands:
Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable.

3.

If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands:
Observe requirements for connecting cables →  34.

37

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

7.3

Connecting the measuring device

NOTICEAn incorrect connection compromises electrical safety!
‣ Have electrical connection work carried out by appropriately trained specialists only.
‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations.
‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations.
‣ Always connect the protective ground cable  before connecting additional cables.
‣ When using in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in thedevice-specific Ex documentation.

7.3.1

Connecting the transmitter
1
2
3
4

A0026781

1
2
3

4

Terminal connection for supply voltage
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output or terminal connection for network connection via
service interface (CDI-RJ45); optional: connection for external WLAN antenna or remote display andoperating module DKX001
Protective earth (PE)In addition to connecting the device via PROFINET with Ethernet-APL and theavailable inputs/outputs, an additional connection option is also available:
Integrate into a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) .
Connecting the plug
3.
n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
ter

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES
C

ES

C

–

–

+

+

E

E
ES

C

ar

3 mm

+

4.

1.

ar

2.

e

e

–

E

3.
A0029813

38

1.

Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Squeeze the tabs of the display module holder together.

4.

Remove the display module holder.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Electrical connection

NiSpcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngrer töfNe gi op fn
so pa zeden when
us s outens vr en
ionir

un
te r

er
Powr ente fn nun g öf whe
enichtnnunNpat op
d vrir
S nozeDoergis ouionene patens
N us
so

I/O

Nicht

un
te r

6.

Nicht

I/O

n
f ne
öf

n
f ne
öf

Ni
Spcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngrer töfNe gi op fn
so pa zeden when
us s outens vr en
ionir

e

e

I/O

ar

ar

ES

ES

C

C

–

–
+

+
E

E

5.
A00298145.

Attach the holder to the edge of the electronics compartment.

6.

Open the terminal cover.
8.

10 (0.4)

7.
n
f ne
öf

e

Nicht

un
ter

mm (in)

ar
ES

C

–
+

9.

E

A0051111

7.

Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

8.

Strip the cable and cable ends and connect to terminals 26-27. In the case of
stranded cables, also fit ferrules.

9.

Connect protective earth (PE).

10. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the connection via the APL port.
Connecting the supply voltage and additional inputs/outputs
1.

2.
10 (0.4)

Nicht

un
ter

n
f ne
öf

e

mm (in)
ar

ES

C

–

3.

+
E

A0051128

Endress+Hauser

1.

Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

2.

Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules.

3.

Connect the protective ground.

39Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

5.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

un
te r

22 mm

e

24 mm
ar
ES

C

–
+
E

4.
A0033984

4.

Connect the cable according to the terminal assignment.
 Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment isdocumented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or→  37.

5.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the cable connection process.

6.

Close the terminal cover.

7.

Fit the display module holder in the electronics compartment.

8.

Screw on the connection compartment cover.

9.

Secure the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

Removing a cable

3 (0.12)1.

2.

A0029598740Engineering unit mm (in)1.

To remove a cable from the terminal, use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the slot
between the two terminal holes2.

while simultaneously pulling the cable end out of the terminal.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

7.3.2

Electrical connection

Connecting the remote display and operating module DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra→  184.

Gnd

Vcc• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one
time.

A

B

81 82 83 84
1
2

3

Gnd

4
5

Vcc

81 82 83 84
A

B

A0027518

1
2
3
4
5

Remote display and operating module DKX001
Terminal connection for potential equalization (PE)Connecting cable
Measuring device
Terminal connection for potential equalization (PE)

7.4

Ensuring potential equalization

7.4.1

Introduction

Correct potential equalization (equipotential bonding) is a prerequisite for stable andreliable flow measurement. Inadequate or incorrect potential equalization can result in
device failure and present a safety hazard.
The following requirements must be observed to ensure correct, trouble-freemeasurement:• The principle that the medium, the sensor and the transmitter must be at the same
electrical potential applies.
• Take in-company grounding guidelines, materials and the grounding conditions andpotential conditions of the pipe into consideration.
• The necessary potential equalization connections must be established using a groundcable with a minimum cross-section of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2) and a cable lug.
• In the case of remote device versions, the ground terminal in the example always refers
to the sensor and not to the transmitter.
You can order accessories such as ground cables and ground disks directly fromEndress+Hauser →  184
For devices intended for use in hazardous areas, observe the instructions in the
Ex documentation (XA).
Abbreviations used
• PE (Protective Earth): potential at the protective earth terminals of the device• PP (Potential Pipe): potential of the pipe, measured at the flanges• PM (Potential Medium): potential of the medium
Endress+Hauser

41

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

7.4.2

Connection examples for standard situations

Unlined and grounded metal pipe
• Potential equalization is via the measuring pipe.
• The medium is set to ground potential.
Starting conditions:• Pipes are correctly grounded on both sides.
• Pipes are conductive and at the same electrical potential as the medium

PE = PP = PM
A0044854‣ Connect the connection housing of the transmitter or sensor to ground potential bymeans of the ground terminal provided for this purpose.

Metal pipe without liner• Potential equalization is via the ground terminal and pipe flanges.
• The medium is set to ground potential.
Starting conditions:• Pipes are not sufficiently grounded.
• Pipes are conductive and at the same electrical potential as the medium

DN ≤ 300

DN ≥ 350

PE = PP = PM
A004208942

1.

Connect both sensor flanges to the pipe flange via a ground cable and ground them.

2.

Connect the connection housing of the transmitter or sensor to ground potential bymeans of the ground terminal provided for this purpose.

3.

For DN ≤ 300 (12"): Mount the ground cable directly on the conductive flange coatingof the sensor with the flange screws.

4.

For DN ≥ 350 (14"): Mount the ground cable directly on the metal transport bracket.
Observe the screw tightening torques: see the Brief Operating Instructions for thesensor.
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Electrical connection

Plastic pipe or pipe with insulating liner
The medium is set to ground potential.
Starting conditions:• The pipe has an insulating effect.
• Low-impedance medium grounding close to the sensor is not guaranteed.
• Equalizing currents through the medium cannot be ruled out.

PE = PP = PM
A00448561.

Connect the ground disks to the ground terminal of the transmitter or sensor
connection housing via the ground cable.

2.

Connect the connection to ground potential.

7.4.3

Connection example with the potential of medium not equal
to protective ground without the "Floating measurement"
optionIn these cases, the medium potential can differ from the potential of the device.
Metal, ungrounded pipe
The sensor and transmitter are installed in a way that provides electrical insulation fromPE, e.g. applications for electrolytic processes or systems with cathodic protection.
Starting conditions:• Unlined metal pipe
• Pipes with an electrically conductive liner

3.
2.

+
–

PE ≠ PP = PM
A0042253

Endress+Hauser

1.

Connect the pipe flanges and transmitter via the ground cable.

2.

Route the shielding of the signal lines via a capacitor (recommended value 1.5µF/
50V).

3.

Device connected to power supply such that it is floating in relation to the protective
earth (isolation transformer). This measure is not required in the case of 24V DC
supply voltage without PE (= SELV power unit).

43Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

7.4.4

Connection examples with the potential of medium not equal
to protective ground with the "Floating measurement" option

In these cases, the medium potential can differ from the potential of the device.
Introduction
The "Floating measurement" option enables the galvanic isolation of the measuring systemfrom the device potential. This minimizes harmful equalizing currents caused bydifferences in potential between the medium and the device. The "Floating measurement"
option is optionally available: order code for "Sensor option", option CV
Operating conditions for the use of the "Floating measurement" option
Device version

Compact version and remote version (length of connecting
cable ≤ 10 m)

Differences in voltage between medium potential As small as possible, usually in the mV range
and device potential
Alternating voltage frequencies in the medium
or at ground potential (PE)

Below typical power line frequency in the country

To achieve the specified conductivity measuring accuracy, a conductivity calibration isrecommended when the device is installed.
A full pipe adjustment is recommended when the device is installed.
Plastic pipe
Sensor and transmitter are correctly grounded. A difference in potential can occur between
the medium and protective earth. Potential equalization between PM and PE via thereference electrode is minimized with the "Floating measurement" option.
Starting conditions:• The pipe has an insulating effect.
• Equalizing currents through the medium cannot be ruled out.

PE = PP ≠ PM
A0044855

1.

Use the "Floating measurement" option, while also observing the operating conditions
for floating measurement.

2.

Connect the connection housing of the transmitter or sensor to ground potential bymeans of the ground terminal provided for this purpose.

Metal, ungrounded pipe with insulating liner
The sensor and transmitter are installed in a way that provides electrical insulation fromPE. The medium and pipe have different potentials. The "Floating measurement" option
minimizes harmful equalizing currents between PM and PP via the reference electrode.
Starting conditions:• Metal pipe with insulating liner• Equalizing currents through the medium cannot be ruled out.

44

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Electrical connection

3.
2.

+
–

PE ≠ PP ≠ PM
A00448571.

Connect the pipe flanges and transmitter via the ground cable.

2.

Route the shielding of the signal cables via a capacitor (recommended value 1.5µF/
50V).

3.

Device connected to power supply such that it is floating in relation to the protective
earth (isolation transformer). This measure is not required in the case of 24V DC
supply voltage without PE (= SELV power unit).

4.

Use the "Floating measurement" option, while also observing the operating conditions
for floating measurement.

7.5

Special connection instructions

7.5.1

Connection examples

PROFINET with Ethernet-APL
6

1

A
B
S

2

A
B

3
5
A
B
S

A
B

4
A0047536

8
1
2
3
4
5
6

Endress+Hauser

Connection example for PROFINET with Ethernet-APL
Cable shield
Measuring device
Local grounding
Potential equalization
Trunk or TCP
Field switch

45

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Current output 4-20 mA
1

2

3
4...20 mA
A00287589123Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active)
Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load
Transmitter

1

2

3

4
4...20 mA

A0028759

 10
1
2
3
4

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load
Transmitter

Pulse/frequency output

1

2

3

12345
A0028761

 11
1
2
3

46

Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive)

Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC with 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistor)
Power supply
Transmitter: observe input values →  192

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Electrical connection

Switch output

1

2

3

A0028760

 12
1
2
3

Connection example for switch output (passive)

Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC with a 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistor)
Power supply
Transmitter: observe input values →  192

Relay output

1

2

3

A0028760

 13
1
2
3

Connection example for relay output (passive)

Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: observe input values →  193

Current input
1

2

3

4

A0028915

 14
1
2
3
4

Endress+Hauser

Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input

Power supply
Terminal box
External measuring device (to read in pressure or temperature, for instance)
Transmitter

47

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Status input

1

2

3

A0028764

 15
1
2
3

Connection example for status input

Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter

7.6

Hardware settings

7.6.1

Setting the device nameA measuring point can be quickly identified within a plant on the basis of the tag name.
The factory-assigned device name can be changed using the DIP switches or the
automation system.
Example: EH-Promag300-XXXX
EH

Endress+Hauser

PromagInstrument family

300

Transmitter

XXXX

Serial number of the device

The device name currently used is displayed in Setup → Name of station.
Setting the device name using the DIP switches
The last part of the device name can be set using DIP switches 1-8. The address range is
between 1 and 254 (factory setting: serial number of the device )Overview of the DIP switches
DIP switch

Bit

1

128

2

64

3

32

4

16

5

8

6

4

7

2

8

1

Description

Configurable part of the device nameExample: setting the device name EH-PROMAG300-065
48

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Electrical connection

DIP switch

ON/OFF

Bit

1

OFF

–

2

ON

64

3…7

OFF

–

8

ON

1

Serial number of the device:065

Device name

EH-PROMAG300-065

Setting the device nameRisk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.
‣ Before opening the transmitter housing:‣ Disconnect the device from the power supply.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1

Name of Station

The default IP address may not be activated →  49.

A00344981.

Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or securing screw ofthe housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover anddisconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary .

3.

Set the desired device name using the corresponding DIP switches on the
I/O electronics module.

4.

Reassemble the transmitter in the reverse order.

5.

Reconnect the device to the power supply.
 The configured device address is used once the device is restarted.

Setting the device name via the automation system
DIP switches 1-8 must all be set to OFF (factory setting) or all be set to ON to be able to set
the device name via the automation system.
The complete device name (name of station) can be changed individually via theautomation system.
• The serial number used as part of the device name in the factory setting is not
saved. It is not possible to reset the device name to the factory setting with theserial number. The device name is empty following the reset.
• When assigning the device name via the automation system:
assign the device name in lower case letters.

7.6.2

Activating the default IP address

Activating the default IP address by DIP switch
Risk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.
‣ Before opening the transmitter housing:
Endress+Hauser

49

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL‣ Disconnect the device from the power supply.
Off On1
2
3
4A00344991.

Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the
housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover anddisconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary .

3.

Set DIP switch no. 2 on the I/O electronics module from OFF → ON.

4.

Reassemble the transmitter in the reverse order.

5.

Reconnect the device to the power supply.
 The default IP address is used once the device is restarted.

7.7

Ensuring the degree of protection

The measuring device fulfills all the requirements for the degree of protection IP66/67,
Type 4X enclosure.
To guarantee the degree of protection IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following
steps after the electrical connection:
1.

Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly.

2.

Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary.

3.

Tighten all housing screws and screw covers.

4.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.

5.

To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry:
Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").
A00292786.

7.8

The cable glands supplied do not provide any housing protection if they are not used.
Therefore, they must be replaced by dummy plugs that match the housing protection.

Post-connection check

Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)?

Is the protective earthing established correctly?
Do the cables used comply with the requirements ?

50

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Electrical connection

Do the mounted cables have adequate strain relief?



Are all cable glands installed, securely tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap"→  50?

Is the terminal assignment correct ?



If supply voltage is present, do values appear on the display module?

Is the potential equalization established correctly ?

Are dummy plugs inserted in unused cable entries and have transportation plugs been replacedwith dummy plugs?

Endress+Hauser

51

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

8Operation options

8.1

Overview of operation options

ESC

-

+

1

E

2

3

4

5
A0046226

1
2
3
4
5

52

Local operation via display module
Computer with web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, SIMATIC PDM)
Field Xpert SMT70
Mobile handheld terminal
Control system (e.g. PLC)

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operation options

8.2

Structure and function of the operating menu

8.2.1

Structure of the operating menu

For an overview of the operating menu for experts: see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document supplied with the device →  216

Operating menu for operators and maintenances
Language
Operatation!
Language

Operator

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Setup

Device tag

Wizard n / Parameter nAdvanced setup

Enter access code
Parameter 1

Task-oriented

Maintenance

Wizard 1 / Parameter 1

Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Diagnostics

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu nOperating menu for experts
ExpertAccess status display
Parameter n

Sensor
Input
OutputCommunication

Function-oriented

ExpertSystemApplication
Diagnostics

A0018237-EN

 16

Endress+Hauser

Schematic structure of the operating menu

53

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

8.2.2

Operating philosophy

The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (operator,
maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device lifecycle.
Menu/parameter
Language

Taskoriented

Operation
Setup

User role and tasks

Content/meaning

Role "Operator", "Maintenance"
Tasks during operation:• Configuration of the operational
display• Reading measured values• Defining the operating language• Defining the Web server operating language• Resetting and controlling totalizers"Maintenance" roleCommissioning:• Configuration of the measurement• Configuration of the inputs andoutputs• Configuration of the communicationinterface

Wizards for quick commissioning:• Configuration of the system units• Display the I/O configuration• Configuration of the inputs• Configuration of the outputs• Configuration of the operational display• Configuration of the low flow cut off• Configuration of empty pipe detection• Configuring the operational display (e.g. display format, display contrast)• Resetting and controlling totalizers

Advanced setup• For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to
special measuring conditions)• Configuration of totalizers• Configuration of electrode cleaning (optional)• Configuration of WLAN settings• Administration (define access code, reset measuring device)
Diagnostics

Expert54

Functionoriented"Maintenance" role
Troubleshooting:• Diagnostics and elimination of process
and device errors• Measured value simulation

Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device
errors:• Diagnostic list
Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages.
• Event logbook
Contains event messages that have occurred.
• Device information
Contains information for identifying the device.
• Measured values
Contains all current measured values.
• Data logging submenu with the "Extended HistoROM" order option
Storage and visualization of measured values• Heartbeat
The functionality of the device is checked on demand and the verification
results are documented.
• Simulation
Is used to simulate measured values or output values.

Tasks that require detailed knowledge ofthe function of the device:• Commissioning measurements underdifficult conditions• Optimal adaptation of themeasurement to difficult conditions• Detailed configuration of thecommunication interface• Error diagnostics in difficult cases

Contains all the parameters of the device and makes it possible to accessthese parameters directly using an access code. The structure of this menu isbased on the function blocks of the device:• SystemContains all higher-level device parameters that do not pertain either tothe measurement or to measured value communication.
• Sensor
Configuration of the measurement.
• Input
Configuration of the status input.
• Output
Configuration of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency
and switch output.
• Communication
Configuration of the digital communication interface and the Web server.
• Application
Configuration of the functions that go beyond the actual measurement(e.g. totalizer).
• Diagnostics
Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device
simulation and Heartbeat Technology.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operation options

8.3

Access to the operating menu via the local display

8.3.1

Operational display
1
2

XXXXXXXXX

4F

31120.50l/h

5A0029346

1
2
3
4
5

Operational display
Tag name
Status area
Display area for measured values (4-line)
Operating elements →  61

Status area
The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right:• Status signals→  149• F: Failure• C: Function check• S: Out of specification• M: Maintenance required• Diagnostic behavior→  150• : Alarm• : Warning• : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware )• : Communication (communication via remote operation is active)
Display area
In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further
description:
Measured variables
SymbolMeaning
Conductivity
Mass flow
Totalizer
The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is displayed.
Status input

Endress+Hauser

55

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Measurement channel numbers
SymbolMeaning
Measurement channel 1 to 4

The measurement channel number is displayed only if more than one channel is present for the same measured
variable type (e.g. totalizer 1 to 3).

Diagnostic behavior
The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayed measured variable.
For information on the symbols →  150

The number and display format of the measured values can be configured via theFormat display parameter (→  121).

56

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

8.3.2

2

Operation options

Navigation view
In the submenu

In the wizard

1

10091-1/../Operation
Access stat.disp

3/../Curr. output 1
S
Assign curr.
Volume flow

2

Operator
Locking status
Display

44

5

5A0013993-EN

1
2
3
4
5

3

A0016327-EN

Navigation view
Navigation path to current position
Status area
Display area for navigation
Operating elements →  61

Navigation path
The navigation path - displayed at the top left in the navigation view - consists of thefollowing elements:• In the submenu:
Display symbol for menu
• In the wizard:
Display symbol for wizard↓
ExamplesOmission symbol for
operating menu levels in
betweenName of current• Submenu• Wizard• Parameters

↓

↓

/ ../

Display/ ../Display

For more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section→  58
Status area
The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner:• In the submenu• The direct access code for the parameter you are navigating to (e.g. 0022-1)• If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• In the wizard
If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal →  149• For information on the function and entry of the direct access code →  63

Endress+Hauser

57

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Display area
Menus
SymbolMeaning
Operation
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Operation" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu
Setup
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Setup" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu
Diagnostics
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu
ExpertAppears:• In the menu next to the "Expert" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu

Submenus, wizards, parameters
SymbolMeaning
Submenu
WizardParameters within a wizard

 No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus.
Locking
SymbolMeaningParameter locked
When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked.
• By a user-specific access code
• By the hardware write protection switch

Wizard operation
SymbolMeaning
Switches to the previous parameter.
Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.
Opens the editing view of the parameter.

58

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

8.3.3

Operation options

Editing view

Numeric editor
1

0
5
+

2

1
6
–

+0.000 Xx
2
3
8
7

4
9

3

4
A0034250

 17
1
2
3
4

For entering values in parameters (e.g. limit values)

Entry display area
Input screen
Confirm, delete or reject entry
Operating elements

Text editor
1

2

XxxxxxxA B C D E F G H I J K
L M N O P Q R S T U V W
X Y Z

6
7

3
5
4

A0034114

 18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

For entering text in parameters (e.g. tag name)

Entry display area
Current input screen
Change input screen
Operating elements
Move entry position
Delete entry
Reject or confirm entry

Using the operating elements in the editing view
Key

Meaning
Minus keyMove the entry position to the left.
Plus keyMove the entry position to the right.

Endress+Hauser

59

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Key

MeaningEnter key
• Pressing the key briefly confirms the selection.
• Pressing the key for 2 s confirms your entry.
+

Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
Close the editing view without accepting a change.

Input screens
SymbolMeaning
Upper case
Lower caseNumbers
Punctuation marks and special characters: = + – * / ² ³ ¼ ½ ¾ ( ) [ ] < > { }Punctuation marks and special characters: ' " `^. , ; : ? ! % µ ° € $ £ ¥ § @ # / \ I ~ & _Umlauts and accents

Controlling data entries
SymbolMeaningMove entry position
Reject entry
Confirm entry
Delete character immediately to the left of the entry position
Delete character immediately to the right of the entry position
Clear all the characters entered

60

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

8.3.4

Operation options

Operating elements

Key

Meaning
Minus key
In menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar upwards in a picklist.
With a wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the previous parameter.
For text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the left.
Plus key
In menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar downwards in a picklist.
With a wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the next parameter.
For text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the right.
Enter key
For operational display
Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
In menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:• Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter.
• Starts the wizard.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s in a parameter:
If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter.
With a wizard
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
For text and numeric editor• Pressing the key briefly confirms the selection.
• Pressing the key for 2 s confirms your entry.
Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
In menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:• Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next level up.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position").

+With a wizard
Exits the wizard and takes you to the next level up.
For text and numeric editor
Closes the editing view without applying changes.
Minus/Enter key combination (press and hold down the keys simultaneously)• If the keypad lock is enabled:
Pressing the key for 3 s disables the keypad lock.
• If the keypad lock is not enabled:
Pressing the key for 3 s opens the context menu including the selection for activating
the keypad lock.

+

8.3.5

Opening the context menu

Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly fromthe operational display:• Setup• Data backup• Simulation

Endress+Hauser

61

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Calling up and closing the context menu
The user is in the operational display.
1.

Press the  and  keys for longer than 3 seconds.
 The context menu opens.
XXXXXXXXXX
Setup
Conf.backup
Simulation
Keylock on

l/hA0034608-EN

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The context menu is closed and the operational display appears.

Calling up the menu via the context menu

621.

Open the context menu.

2.

Press  to navigate to the desired menu.

3.

Press  to confirm the selection.
 The selected menu opens.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

8.3.6

Operation options

Navigating and selecting from list

Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The
navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of theindividual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation.
For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements→  57
Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values"
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
1.

0104-1Main menu
Language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup

2.

Main menu
Language
Display/operat.
Setup/ ../Display/operat.

0091-1

Access stat.disp

3.

Operator
Locking status
Display/ ../Display/operat.
Locking status
Display4.

/ ../Display

0098-1

Format display
1 value, max.
Contrast display
Display intervall

5.

/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

6.

0098-1/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

7.

0098-1XXXXXXXXX

8.

2s

10.50
mA
2800
Hz
A0029562-EN

8.3.7

Calling the parameter directly

A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter
directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter
calls up the desired parameter directly.
Navigation path
Expert → Direct accessEndress+Hauser

63

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

The direct access code consists of a 5-digit number (at maximum) and the channel
number, which identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 00914-2. In the navigation
view, this appears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter.
00914-2

1

A0029414

1

Direct access code

Note the following when entering the direct access code:• The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered.
Example: Enter "914" instead of "00914"• If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is opened automatically.
Example: Enter 00914 → Assign process variable parameter• If a different channel is opened: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding
channel number.
Example: Enter 00914-2 → Assign process variable parameter
For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document for the device

8.3.8

Calling up help text

Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view.
The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports
swift and safe commissioning.
Calling up and closing the help text
The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter.
1.

Press  for 2 s.
 The help text for the selected parameter opens.
Ent. access code
Enter access code to disable
write protec.

A0014002-EN

 19

2.

Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code"

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The help text is closed.

8.3.9

Changing the parameters

Parameters can be changed via the numeric editor or text editor.
• Numeric editor: Change values in a parameter, e.g. specifications for limit values.
• Text editor: Enter text in a parameter, e.g. tag name.
A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range.

64

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operation options

Ent. access code
Invalid or out of range input
value
Min:0
Max:9999
A0014049-EN

For a description of the editing view - consisting of the text editor and numeric editor- with symbols →  59, for a description of the operating elements →  61

8.3.10User roles and related access authorization

The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to theparameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device
configuration via the local display from unauthorized access →  132.
Defining access authorization for user roles
An access code is not yet defined when the device is delivered from the factory. Accessauthorization (read and write access) to the device is not restricted and corresponds to the"Maintenance" user role.

‣ Define the access code.
 The "Operator" user role is redefined in addition to the "Maintenance" user role.
Access authorization differs for the two user roles.
Access authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role
Access code status

Read access

Write accessAn access code has not yet been defined(factory setting).



After an access code has been defined.



 1)

1)

The user only has write access after entering the access code.

Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role
Access code status
After an access code has been defined.
1)

Read access

Write access



– 1)

Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excluded fromthe write protection, as they do not affect the measurement. Refer to the "Write protection via access code"
sectionThe user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Accessstatus parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access status

8.3.11Disabling write protection via access code

If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter iswrite-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the
moment using local operation →  132.
Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specificaccess code in the Enter access code parameter (→  118) via the respective access
option.
1.
Endress+Hauser

After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears.
65

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

2.

Enter the access code.
 The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously writeprotected parameters are now re-enabled.

8.3.12

Enabling and disabling the keypad lockThe keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local
operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu orchange the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on
the operational display.
The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu.
Switching on the keypad lockThe keypad lock is switched on automatically:• If the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute.
• Each time the device is restarted.
To activate the keylock manually:1.

The device is in the measured value display.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 A context menu appears.

2.

In the context menu select the Keylock on option.
 The keypad lock is switched on.
If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, theKeylock on message appears.

Switching off the keypad lock

‣ The keypad lock is switched on.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 The keypad lock is switched off.

66

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operation options

8.4

Access to operating menu via Web browser

8.4.1

PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Device use

Device connection to an APL field switch
The device may only be operated according to the following APL port
classifications:• If used in hazardous areas: SLAA or SLAC 1)• If used in non-hazardous areas: SLAX
• Connection values of APL field switch (for example corresponds to APL port
classification SPCC or SPAA):• Maximum input voltage: 15 VDC• Minimum output values: 0.54 W
Device connection to an SPE switch
If used in non-hazardous areas: suitable SPE switch
SPE switch prerequisite:• Support of 10BASE-T1L standard• Support of PoDL power class 10, 11 or 12• Detection of SPE field devices without integrated PoDL module
Connection values of SPE switch:• Maximum input voltage: 30 VDC• Minimum output values: 1.85 W

PROFINET

According to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784

Ethernet-APL

According to IEEE 802.3cg, APL port profile specification v1.0, galvanicallyisolated

Data transfer

10 Mbit/s

Current consumption

TransmitterMax. 55.56 mA

Permitted supply voltage• Ex: 9 to 15 V
• Non-Ex: 9 to 32 V

Network connection

With integrated reverse polarity protection

1)

For more information on using the device in the hazardous area, see the Ex-specific Safety Instructions

8.4.2

Prerequisites

Computer hardware
Hardware

CDI-RJ45

WLAN

Interface

The computer must have an RJ45
interface. 1)

The operating unit must have a WLAN
interface.

Connection

Standard Ethernet cable

Connection via Wireless LAN.

ScreenRecommended size: ≥12" (depends on the screen resolution)

1)

Endress+Hauser

Interface

Recommended cable: CAT5e, CAT6 or CAT7, with shielded connector (e.g. brand YAMAICHI ; Part No YConProfixPlug63 / Prod. ID: 82-006660)

67Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Computer software
Software

Interface
CDI-RJ45

Recommended operating
systems

WLAN• Microsoft Windows 8 or higher.
• Mobile operating systems:• iOS• Android Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 7 is supported.
Web browsers supported• Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher• Microsoft Edge
• Mozilla Firefox• Google Chrome• SafariComputer settings
Settings

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

User rights

Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server
settings are necessary (for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.).

Proxy server settings of the
web browser

The web browser setting Use proxy server for LAN must be disabled .

JavaScript

JavaScript must be enabled.
JavaScript cannot be enabled: IfEnter
http://192.168.1.212/servlet/basic.html in the address bar of the
web browser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating
menu structure starts in the web browser.
installing a new firmware version: WhenTo enable correct data display, clear the temporary memory (cache)under Internet options in the web browser.

Network connections

Only the active network connections to the measuring device should be used.
Switch off all other network
connections such as WLAN.

Switch off all other network
connections.

In the event of connection problems: →  146
Measuring device: Via CDI-RJ45 service interface
Device

CDI-RJ45 service interface

Measuring device

The measuring device has an RJ45 interface.

Web server

Web server must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  73
Measuring device: via WLAN interface
DeviceWLAN interface

Measuring device

The measuring device has a WLAN antenna:• Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna• Transmitter with external WLAN antenna

Web server

Web server and WLAN must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  73
68

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

8.4.3

Operation options

Establishing a connection

Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
Preparing the measuring device
1.

Depending on the housing version:
Loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version:
Unscrew or open the housing cover.

3.

Connect the computer to the RJ45 plug via the standard Ethernet cable .

Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer
The following information refers to the default Ethernet settings of the device.
IP address of the device: 192.168.1.212 (factory setting)
The IP address can be assigned to the measuring device in a variety of ways:• Software addressing:
The IP address is entered via the IP address parameter (→  95) .
• DIP switch for "Default IP address":
To establish the network connection via the service interface (CDI-RJ45): the fixed IP
address 192.168.1.212 is used .
To establish a network connection via the service interface (CDI-RJ45): set the "Default IP
address" DIP switch to ON. The measuring device then has the fixed IP address:
192.168.1.212. The fixed IP address 192.168.1.212 can now be used to establish theconnection to the network.
1.

Via DIP switch 2, activate the default IP address 192.168.1.212: .

2.

Switch on the measuring device.

3.

Connect the computer to the RJ45 plug via the standard Ethernet cable →  75.

4.

If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook.
 Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications,Internet or Windows Explorer.

5.

Close any open Internet browsers.

6.

Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table:

IP address

192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 → e.g.
192.168.1.213

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

Default gateway

192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty

Via WLAN interface
Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.

Endress+Hauser

69

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

NOTICE
Note the following to avoid a network conflict:‣ Avoid accessing the measuring device simultaneously from the same mobile terminal
via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a WLAN connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password:
Serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g. L100A802000).
 The LED on the display module flashes. It is now possible to operate themeasuring device with the web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Terminating the WLAN connection‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the mobile terminal and measuring device.
Starting the Web browser
1.

70

Start the Web browser on the computer.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

2.

Operation options

Enter the IP address of the web server in the address line of the web browser:
192.168.1.212
 The login page appears.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7
8
9
10
A0029417

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Picture of device
Device name
Device tag
Status signal
Current measured values
Operating language
User role
Access code
Login
Reset access code (→  129)

If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete →  146

8.4.4

Logging on

1.

Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser.

2.

Enter the user-specific access code.

3.

Press OK to confirm your entry.

Access code

0000 (factory setting); can be changed by customer

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.

Endress+Hauser

71

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

8.4.5

User interface

1
2

3
A0029418

1
2
3Function row
Local display language
Navigation area

Header
The following information appears in the header:• Device name• Device tag• Device status with status signal →  152• Current measured values
Function row
Functions

Meaning

Measured values

Displays the measured values of the device

Menu• Access to the operating menu from the measuring device• The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display
information on the structure of the operating menu: see the Description of Detailed
Device Parameters

Device status

Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority

Data
management

Data exchange between computer and measuring device:• Device configuration:• Load settings from the device(XML format, save configuration)• Save settings to the device(XML format, restore configuration)• Logbook - Export Event logbook (.csv file)• Documents - Export documents:• Export backup data record(.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration)• Verification report(PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package)• Firmware update - Flashing a firmware version

Network

Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection to
the measuring device:• Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address)• Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version)

Logout

End the operation and call up the login page

Navigation area
The menus, the associated submenus and parameters can be selected in the navigation
area.

72

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operation options

Working area
Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be
performed in this area:• Configuring parameters• Reading measured values• Calling up help text
• Starting an upload/download

8.4.6

Disabling the Web server

The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the
Web server functionality parameter.
Navigation"Expert" menu → Communication → Web server
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Web server functionality

Description
Switch the Web server on and off.

Selection• Off• HTML Off• On

Factory setting
On

Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter
OptionDescription

Off• The Web server is completely disabled.
• Port 80 is locked.

HTML OffThe HTML version of the Web server is not available.

On• The complete Web server functionality is available.
• JavaScript is used.
• The password is transferred in an encrypted state.
• Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state.

Enabling the Web server
If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality
parameter via the following operating options:• Via local display• Via Bedientool "FieldCare"• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool

8.4.7

Logging out

Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function(upload configuration from device) if necessary.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Select the Logout entry in the function row.
 The home page with the Login box appears.

2.

Close the Web browser.

73

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

3.

If no longer needed:
Reset the modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) →  69.
If communication with the web server was established via the default IP address
192.168.1.212, DIP switch no. 10 must be reset (from ON → OFF). Afterwards, the IP
address of the device is active again for network communication.

8.5

Access to the operating menu via the operating tool

The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via
the local display.

8.5.1

Connecting the operating tool

Via APL network
1

2

3

4
5

6

6

6
A0046117

 20
1
2
3
4
5
6

74

Options for remote operation via APL network

Automation system, e.g. Simatic S7 (Siemens)
Ethernet switch, e.g. Scalance X204 (Siemens)
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for access to integrated Web server or computer with
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare with PROFINET COM DTM or SIMATIC PDM with FDI-Package)
APL power switch (optional)
APL field switch
Measuring device

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operation options

Service interface
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A point-to-point connection can be established via onsite device configuration. With the
housing open, the connection is established directly via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) of
the device.
An adapter for the RJ45 to the M12 plug is optionally available for the non-hazardous
area:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 plug mounted in thecable entry. The connection to the service interface can be established via an M12
plug without opening the device.

1
3

2

A0027563

 21
1
2
3

Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

Computer with Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated
Web server or with "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 plug
Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server

Via WLAN interface
The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version:
Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN"
3

1

4

5

2

6

3

4

7
A0034570

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Endress+Hauser

Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna
Transmitter with external WLAN antenna
LED lit constantly: WLAN reception is enabled on measuring device
LED flashing: WLAN connection established between operating unit and measuring device
Computer with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) foraccessing the integrated device Web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
Mobile handheld terminal with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft
Edge) for accessing the integrated device Web server or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
Smart phone or tablet (e.g. Field Xpert SMT70)

75

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Function

WLAN: IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz)

Encryption

WPA2-PSK AES-128 (in accordance with IEEE 802.11i)

Configurable WLAN channels

1 to 11Degree of protection

IP67

Available antennas• Internal antenna• External antenna (optional)
In the event of poor transmission/reception conditions at the place ofinstallation.

 Only 1 antenna is active at any one time!
Range• Internal antenna: typically 10 m (32 ft)• External antenna: typically 50 m (164 ft)

Materials (external antenna)• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylonitrile styrene acrylate) and nickel-plated
brass• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass• Cable: Polyethylene• Plug: Nickel-plated brass• Angle bracket: Stainless steel

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICE
Note the following to avoid a network conflict:‣ Avoid accessing the measuring device simultaneously from the same mobile terminal
via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a WLAN connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password:
Serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g. L100A802000).
 The LED on the display module flashes. It is now possible to operate themeasuring device with the web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Terminating the WLAN connection‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the mobile terminal and measuring device.

76

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

8.5.2

Operation options

FieldCare

Function scope
FDT (Field Device Technology)-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.
It can configure all smart field units in a system and helps you manage them. By using thestatus information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking their status andcondition.
Access is via:
• CDI-RJ45 service interface →  75
• WLAN interface →  75
Typical functions:• Configuring parameters of transmitters• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)• Documentation of the measuring point• Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook
For additional information about FieldCare, see Operating Instructions BA00027S
and BA00059S
Source for device description files
See information →  80
Establishing a connection
1.

Start FieldCare and launch the project.

2.

In the network: Add a device.
 The Add device window opens.

3.

Select the CDI Communication TCP/IP option from the list and press OK to confirm.

4.

Right-click CDI Communication TCP/IP and select the Add device option in thecontext menu that opens.

5.

Select the desired device from the list and press OK to confirm.
 The CDI Communication TCP/IP (Configuration) window opens.

6.

Enter the device address in the IP address field: 192.168.1.212 and press Enter toconfirm.

7.

Establish the online connection to the device.
For additional information, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S

Endress+Hauser

77

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

User interface
2

4

3

6

5

7

Xxxxxx/…/…/

1

Device name:

Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Xxxxxxx

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Status:Good

XxxxxxAccess status tooling+
Operation
P

–

Setup
Device tag–
System unitsP
Mass flow unit
P
Volume flow unit+
Select medium
P

8

+

…

+

…

+

Maintenance

Mass flow unit:

kg/hVolume flow unit:m³/h

Xxxxxx
kg/h
m³/h

9

Advanced setup+

Diagnostics+

Expert10

11A0021051-EN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

HeaderPicture of device
Device nameTag name
Status area with status signal →  152
Display area for current measured values
Edit toolbar with additional functions such as save/load, event list and create documentation
Navigation area with operating menu structure
Working area
Range of action
Status area

8.5.3

DeviceCare

Function scope
Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.
The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated"DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient,comprehensive solution.
For details, see Innovation Brochure IN01047S
Source for device description files
See information →  80

8.5.4

SIMATIC PDM

Function scope
SIMATIC PDM is a standardized, vendor-independent program from Siemens for theoperation, configuration, maintenance and diagnosis of intelligent field devices via
PROFINET protocol.
78

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operation options

Source for device description files
See information →  80

Endress+Hauser

79

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

9

System integration

9.1

Overview of device description files

9.1.1

Current version data for the device

Firmware version

01.00.zz• On the title page of the Operating Instructions• On the transmitter nameplate• Firmware version
Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware
version

Manufacturer

17

Manufacturer
Expert → Communication → Physical block→ Manufacturer

Device ID

0xA43C–

Device type ID

Promag 300

Device type
Expert → Communication → Physical block → Device
type

Device revision

1–

PROFINET with Ethernet-APL
version

2.43

Version of the PROFINET specification

For an overview of the various firmware versions for the device →  180

9.1.2

Operating tools

The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the tablebelow, along with information on where the file can be acquired.
FieldCare• www.endress.com → Download Area
• USB stick (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

DeviceCare• www.endress.com → Download Area
• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

SIMATIC PDM(Siemens)

www.endress.com → Download Area

9.2

Device master file (GSD)

In order to integrate field devices into a bus system, PROFINET needs a description of thedevice parameters, such as output data, input data, data format and data volume.
These data are available in the device master file (GSD) which is provided to theautomation system when the communication system is commissioned. In addition device
bit maps, which appear as icons in the network structure, can also be integrated.
The device master file (GSD) is in XML format, and the file is created in the GSDML
description markup language.
With the PA Profile 4.02 device master file (GSD) it is possible to exchange field devices
made by different manufacturers without having to reconfigure.
The use of two different device master files (GSDs) is possible: the manufacturer-specific
GSD and the PA-Profile GSD.

80

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

9.2.1

System integration

File name of the manufacturer-specific device master file
(GSD)

Example of the name of a device master file:
GSDML-V2.43-EH-PROMAG_300_500_APL_yyyymmdd.xml
GSDML

Description language

V2.43

Version of the PROFINET specification

EH

Endress+Hauser

PROMAG

Instrument family

300_500_APL

Transmitteryyyymmdd

Date of issue (yyyy: year, mm: month, dd: day)

.xml

File name extension (XML file)

9.2.2

File name of the PA Profile device master file (GSD)

Example of the name of a PA Profile device master file:
GSDML-V2.43-PA_Profile_V4.02-B332-FLOW_EL_MAGNETIC-yyyymmdd.xml
GSDML

Description language

V2.43

Version of the PROFINET specification

PA_Profile_V4.02

Version of the PA Profile specification

B332

PA Profile device identification

FLOW

Product family

EL_MAGNETIC

Flow measuring principle

yyyymmdd

Date of issue (yyyy: year, mm: month, dd: day)

.xml

File name extension (XML file)API
0x9700Supported modules

Slot

Input and output variables

Analog input

1

Volume flow

Totalizer

2

Totalizer value: volume/volume
Totalizer control

Source for device master files (GSD):
Manufacturer-specific GSD: www.endress.com → Download Area
PA Profile GSD:

Endress+Hauser

https://www.profibus.com/products/gsd-files/gsd-library-profile-for-processcontrol-devices-version-40 → Download Area

81

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

9.3

Cyclic data transmission

9.3.1

Overview of the modules

The following graphic shows which modules are available to the device for cyclic datatransfer. Cyclic data transfer is performed with an automation system.
Measuring device
API

Modules

Slot

Sub-slot

Direction
Data flow

Analog Input 1 (Volume flow)

1

1

→

Analog Input 2

20

1

→

Analog Input 3

21

1

→

Analog Input 4

22

1

→

Analog Input 5

23

1

→

Analog Input 6

24

1

→

Analog Input 7

25

1

→

Analog Input 8

26

1

→

Totalizer 1 (Volume)

2

1

→
←

Totalizer 2

70

1

→
←

Totalizer 3

71

1

→
←

Binary Input 1 (Heartbeat)

80

1

→

Binary Input 2

81

1

→

Analog Output 1 (Temperature)

160

1

←

Analog Output 2 (Density)

161

1

←

Binary Input 1 (Heartbeat)

210

1

←

Binary Output 2

211

1

←

0x9700

9.3.2

ControlsystemPROFINET

Description of the modules

The data structure is described from the perspective of the automation system:• Input data: Are sent from the measuring device to the automation system.
• Output data: Are sent from the automation system to the measuring device.
Analog Input module
Transmit input variables from the measuring device to the automation system.
Analog Input modules cyclically transmit the selected input variables, including the status,
from the measuring device to the automation system. The input variable is depicted in thefirst four bytes in the form of a floating point number as per the IEEE 754 standard. The
fifth byte contains standardized status information pertaining to the input variable.

82

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

System integration

Selection: input variable
Slot

Sub-slot

Input variables

1

1

Volume flow

20 to 26

• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Temperature• Electronics temperature• Buildup index• Current input 1• Current input 2• Current input 3

1

Additional input variables with the Heartbeat Verification
application package• Noise• Coil current rise time
• Reference electrode potential against PE• HBSI
Additional input variables with the Conductivity application
package• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity

Data structure
Output data of Analog Output
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)
1)

Byte 5
Status 1)

Status coding →  88

Binary Input module
Transmit binary input variables from the measuring device to the automation system.
Binary input variables are used by the measuring device to transmit the state of device
functions to the automation system.
Binary Input modules cyclically transmit discrete input variables, including the status, fromthe measuring device to the automation system. The discrete input variable is depicted in
the first byte. The second byte contains standardized status information pertaining to the
input variable.
Selection: Device function Binary Input Slot 80
Slot

80

Endress+Hauser

Sub-slot

1

Bit

Device function

Status (meaning)0

Verification has not been
performed.

• 0 (device function not active)• 1 (device function active)

1

Verification has failed.

2

Currently performing verification.

3

Verification completed.

4

Verification has failed.

5

Verification performed successfully.

6

Verification has not been
performed.

7

Reserved

83

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Selection: Device function Binary Input Slot 81
Slot

Sub-slot

81

1

Bit

Device function

Status (meaning)0

Partially empty pipe detection

1

Low flow cut off• 0 (device function not active)• 1 (device function active)

2

Reserved

3

Reserved

4

Reserved

5

Reserved

6

Reserved

7

Reserved

Data structure
Input data of Binary Input
Byte 1

Byte 2Binary Input

Status 1)

1)

Status coding →  88

Volume module
Transmit the volume counter value from the measuring device to the automation system.
The Volume module cyclically transmits the volume, including the status, from themeasuring device to the automation system. The totalizer value is depicted in the first four
bytes in the form of a floating point number as per the IEEE 754 standard. The fifth byte
contains standardized status information pertaining to the input variable.
Selection: input variable
Slot

Sub-slot2

1

Input variables
VolumeData structure
Volume input data
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)
1)

Byte 5
Status 1)

Status coding →  88

Volume Totalizer Control module
Transmit the volume counter value from the measuring device to the automation system.
The Volume Totalizer Control module cyclically transmits the volume, including the status,
from the measuring device to the automation system. The totalizer value is depicted in thefirst four bytes in the form of a floating point number as per the IEEE 754 standard. The
fifth byte contains standardized status information pertaining to the input variable.

84

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

System integration

Selection: input variable
Slot

Sub-slot2

1

Input variables
VolumeData structure
Volume Totalizer Control input data
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Status 1)

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)
1)

Byte 5

Status coding →  88

Selection: output variable
Transmit the control value from the automation system to the measuring device.
Slot

Sub-slot

2

Value

1

Input variable

1

Reset to "0"2

Preset value

3

Stop

4

Totalize

Data structure
Volume Totalizer Control output data
Byte 1
Control variable

Totalizer module
Transmit totalizer value from the measuring device to the automation system.
The Totalizer module cyclically transmits a selected totalizer value, including the status,
from the measuring device to the automation system. The totalizer value is depicted in thefirst four bytes in the form of a floating point number as per the IEEE 754 standard. The
fifth byte contains standardized status information pertaining to the input variable.
Selection: input variable
Slot

Sub-slot70 to 71

1

Input variable• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Data structure
Totalizer input data
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)
1)

Endress+Hauser

Byte 5
Status 1)

Status coding →  88

85

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Totalizer Control module
Transmit totalizer value from the measuring device to the automation system.
The Totalizer Control module cyclically transmits a selected totalizer value, including thestatus, from the measuring device to the automation system. The totalizer value isdepicted in the first four bytes in the form of a floating point number as per the IEEE 754
standard. The fifth byte contains standardized status information pertaining to the input
variable.
Selection: input variable
Slot

Sub-slot70 to 71

1

Input variable• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Data structure
Totalizer Control input data
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Status 1)

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)
1)

Byte 5

Status coding →  88

Selection: output variable
Transmit the control value from the automation system to the measuring device.
Slot

Sub-slot70 to 71

Value

1

Input variable

1

Reset to "0"2

Preset value

3

Stop

4

Totalize

Data structure
Totalizer Control output data
Byte 1
Control variable

Analog Output module
Transmit a compensation value from the automation system to the measuring device.
Analog Output modules cyclically transmit compensation values, including the status andassociated unit, from the automation system to the measuring device. The compensation
value is depicted in the first four bytes in the form of a floating point number as per theIEEE 754 standard. The fifth byte contains standardized status information pertaining to
the compensation value.
Assigned compensation values
The selection is made via: Expert → Sensor → External compensation

86

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Slot

System integration

Sub-slot

160

Compensation value
Temperature

1

161

Density

Data structure
Output data of Analog Output
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)
1)

Byte 5
Status 1)

Status coding →  88

Failsafe mode
A failsafe mode can be defined for using the compensation values.
If the status is GOOD or UNCERTAIN, the compensation values transmitted by theautomation system are used. If the status is BAD, the failsafe mode is activated for the useof the compensation values.
Parameters are available per compensation value to define the failsafe mode: Expert→ Sensor → External compensation
Fail safe type parameter• Fail safe value option: The value defined in the Fail safe value parameter is used.
• Fallback value option: The last valid value is used.
• Off option: The failsafe mode is disabled.
Fail safe value parameter
Use this parameter to enter the compensation value which is used if the Fail safe value
option is selected in the Fail safe type parameter.
Binary Output module
Transmit binary output values from the automation system to the measuring device.
Binary output values are used by the automation system to enable and disable device
functions.
Binary output values cyclically transmit discrete output values, including the status, fromthe automation system to the measuring device. The discrete output values aretransmitted in the first byte. The second byte contains standardised status information
pertaining to the output value.
Selection: Device function Binary Output Slot 210
Slot

210

Endress+Hauser

Sub-slot

1

Bit

Device function

Status (meaning)0

Start verification.

1

Reserved

A change of status from 0 to 1
starts Heartbeat Verification 1)

2

Reserved

3

Reserved

4

Reserved

5

Reserved

87

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Slot

1)

Sub-slot

Bit

Device function

6

Reserved

7

Reserved

Status (meaning)

Only available with the Heartbeat application package

Selection: Device function Binary Output Slot 211
Slot

Sub-slot

211

1

Bit

Device function

Status (meaning)0

Flow override

1

Zero adjust• 0 (disable device function)• 1 (enable device function)

2

Relay output

Relay output value:

3

Relay output

4

Relay output

• 0
• 1

5

Reserved

6

Reserved

7

Reserved

Data structure
Binary Output input data

1)
2)

Byte 1

Byte 2Binary Output

Status 1) 2)

Status coding →  88
If the status is BAD, the control variable is not adopted.

9.3.3

88

Status coding

StatusCoding (hex)Meaning

BAD - Maintenance alarm

0x24 to 0x27

A measured value is not available because a device
error has occurred.

BAD - Process related

0x28 to 0x2B

A measured value is not available because the process
conditions are not within the device's technicalspecification limits.

BAD - Function check

0x3C to 0x03F

A function check is active (e.g. cleaning or calibration)

UNCERTAIN - Initial value

0x4F to 0x4F

A predefined value is output until a correct measured
value is available again or corrective measures havebeen performed that change this status.

UNCERTAIN Maintenance demanded

0x68 to 0x6B

Signs of wear and tear have been detected on themeasuring device. Short-term maintenance is needed
to ensure that the measuring device remains
operational.
The measured value might be invalid. The use of themeasured value depends on the application.

UNCERTAIN - Process
related0x78 to 0x7B

The process conditions are not within the device's
technical specification limits. This could have anegative impact on the quality and accuracy of themeasured value.
The use of the measured value depends on theapplication.

GOOD - OK

0x80 to 0x83

No error has been diagnosed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

System integration

StatusCoding (hex)Meaning

GOOD - Maintenancerequired

0xA4 to 0xA7

The measured value is valid.
The device will require servicing in the near future.

GOOD - Maintenancedemanded

0xA8 to 0xAB

The measured value is valid.
It is highly advisable to service the device in the near
future.

GOOD - Function check

0xBC to 0XBF

The measured value is valid.
The measuring device is performing an internalfunction check. The function check does not have any
noticeable effect on the process.

9.3.4

Factory setting

The slots are already assigned in the automation system for initial commissioning.
Assigned slots

Endress+Hauser

Slot

Factory setting

1

Volume flow

2

Volume20 to 26–

70 to 71–

80 to 81–

160 to 161–

210 to 211–

89

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

9.4

System redundancy S2

A redundant layout with two automation systems is necessary for processes that are incontinuous operation. If one system fails the second system guarantees continued,
uninterrupted operation. The measuring device supports S2 system redundancy and cancommunicate with both automation systems simultaneously.
1

3

2

4

5

6

6

6
A0047362

 22
1
2
3
4
5
6

Example of the layout of a redundant system (S2): star topology

Automation system 1
Synchronization of automation systems
Automation system 2
Industrial Ethernet Managed Switch
APL field switch
Measuring device

All the devices in the network must support S2 system redundancy.

90

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

10

Commissioning

10.1

Post-installation and post-connection check

Before commissioning the device:‣ Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed
successfully.

• "Post-installation check" checklist →  33
• "Post-connection check" checklist →  50

10.2

Switching on the measuring device‣ After a successful post-installation and post-connection check, switch on the device.
 After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup
display to the operational display.
If the local display is blank or if a diagnostic message is displayed, refer to the section
on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" →  145.

10.3

Connecting via FieldCare• For FieldCare →  75 connection• For connecting via FieldCare →  77
• For the FieldCare →  78 user interface

10.4

Setting the operating language

Factory setting: English or ordered local language
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX

1.

XX
Main menu
Display language

0104-1EnglishOperation
Setup

2.

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français3.

4.

0104-1

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français
Hauptmenü
Sprache0104-10104-1
DeutschBetrieb
Setup
A0029420

 23

Endress+Hauser

Taking the example of the local display

91

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

10.5

Configuring the measuring device• The Setup menu with its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard
operation.
• Navigation to the Setup menu
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
1.

Main menu
Display language

0104-1EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup

2.

Diagnostic/ ../Setup
Medium selection

3.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
A0032222-EN

 24

Taking the example of the local display

The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device (→ "Supplementary documentation" section).
Navigation"Setup" menu → PROFINET device name

 Setup

92

PROFINET device name→  93‣ Communication→  93‣ System units→  95‣ Analog inputs→  98‣ I/O configuration→  99‣ Current input 1 to n

→  99‣ Status input 1 to n

→  101‣ Current output 1 to n

→  101

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  104‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  110‣ Low flow cut off→  112‣ Empty pipe detection→  113‣ Configure flow damping→  114‣ Advanced setup→  117

1 to n10.5.1

Defining the tag nameA measuring point can be quickly identified within a plant on the basis of the tag name.
The tag name is equivalent to the device name (name of station) of the PROFINET
specification (data length: 255 bytes)
The device name can be changed via DIP switches or the automation system .
The device name currently used is displayed in the Name of station parameter.
Navigation"Setup" menu → PROFINET device nameParameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

PROFINET device nameName of the measuring point.

10.5.2User interface
Max. 32 characters such as
letters and numbers.

Factory setting
EH-PROMAG300 serial
number of the device

Displaying the communication interface

The Communication submenu shows all the current parameter settings for selecting andconfiguring the communication interface.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Communication‣ Communication

Endress+Hauser‣ APL port

→  94‣ Service interface→  94‣ Network diagnostics→  9593

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL"APL port" submenu
Navigation"Setup" menu → Communication → APL port

‣ APL port
IP address (7263)→  94Subnet mask (7265)→  94

Default gateway (7264)→  94

MAC address (7262)→  94

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry / User interface

Factory setting

IP addressEnter the IP address of the measuring
device.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters (15)0.0.0.0

Default gateway

Enter IP address for the default gateway ofthe measuring device.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters (15)0.0.0.0

Subnet mask

Enter subnet mask of the measuring device.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters (15)255.255.255.0

MAC address

Shows the MAC address of the measuring
device.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters"Service interface" submenu
Navigation"Setup" menu → Communication → Service interface‣ Service interface

94

IP address (7209)→  95Subnet mask (7211)→  95

Default gateway (7210)→  95

MAC address (7214)→  95Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry / User interface

Factory setting

IP addressEnter the IP address of the measuring
device.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (in theparticular octet)

192.168.1.212

Subnet mask

Displays the subnet mask.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (in theparticular octet)

255.255.255.0

Default gateway

Displays the default gateway.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (in theparticular octet)

0.0.0.0

MAC address

Displays the MAC address of the measuring
device.

Unique 12-digit character
string comprising letters andnumbers, e.g.:
00:07:05:10:01:5F

Each measuring device is given
an individual address.

 MAC = Media Access Control"Network diagnostics" submenu

Navigation"Setup" menu → Communication → Network diagnostics‣ Network diagnostics
Mean squared error (7258)→  95

Number of failed received packets(7257)→  95

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Mean squared error

Provides an indication of the link signal
quality.

Number of failed received packets

Shows the number of failed received packets. 0 to 65 535

10.5.3Signed floating-point number

Factory setting
0 dB
0Setting the system units

In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set.
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device (→ "Supplementary documentation" section).
Navigation"Setup" menu → System units‣ System units

Endress+Hauser

Volume flow unit

→  96

Volume unit

→  9695

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Conductivity unit

→  96

Temperature unit

→  96Mass flow unit

→  96Mass unit→  96

Density unit

→  96

Corrected volume flow unit

→  97

Corrected volume unit

→  97

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Volume flow unit

Prerequisite–

Description
Select volume flow unit.

Selection

Factory setting

Unit choose list

Depends on country:• l/h• gal/min (us)EffectThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Low flow cut off• Simulation process variable
Volume unit–

Select volume unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• m³• gal (us)Conductivity unit

The On option is selected in
the Conductivity
measurement parameterparameter.

Select conductivity unit.

Unit choose list

µS/cm

–

Select temperature unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• °C
• °F

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/h• lb/minTemperature unit

EffectThe selected unit applies for:
Simulation process variable

EffectThe selected unit applies for:• Temperature parameter• Maximum value parameter• Minimum value parameter• External temperatureparameter• Maximum value parameter• Minimum value parameter
Mass flow unit–

Select mass flow unit.
EffectThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Low flow cut off• Simulation process variable

Mass unit–

Select mass unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• kg
• lb

Density unit–

Select density unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/l• lb/ft³

EffectThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Simulation process variable

96

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter
Corrected volume flow unit

Commissioning

Prerequisite–

Description
Select corrected volume flow
unit.

Selection

Factory setting

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nl/h• Sft³/h

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nm³• Sft³ResultThe selected unit applies for:
Corrected volume flow
parameter (→  136)
Corrected volume unit

Endress+Hauser–

Select corrected volume unit.

97

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

10.5.4

Configuration of the Analog Inputs

The Analog inputs submenu guides the user systematically to the individual Analog input
1 to n submenu. From here you get to the parameters of the individual analog input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Analog inputs‣ Analog inputs‣ Volume flow

→  98"Analog inputs" submenu
Navigation"Setup" menu → Analog inputs → Volume flow

‣ Volume flow
Assign process variable (11074)→  98Damping (11073)→  98Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Parent class

User interface / User entry

Factory setting

0 to 255

60

Assign process variable

Select a process variable.

• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Temperature• Electronics temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot time *• Reference electrodepotential against PE *• HBSI *• Build-up index **• Current input 1• Current input 2• Current input 3• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Corrected conductivity *• Corrected volume flow

Volume flow

DampingEnter time constant for input damping (PT1element). Damping reduces the effect offluctuations in the measured value on the
output signal.

Positive floating-point number

1.0 s

*
**

Visibility depends on order options or device settings
The build-up index is only available in conjunction with Heartbeat Technology. If Heartbeat Technology was ordered together with the measuring
device, the option will already be enabled, and no further action is required. If Heartbeat Technology was ordered at a later date, you must firstactivate the option under ‘Activate SW option’ by entering the activation key you received. To purchase Heartbeat Technology, contact your local
sales and service center. In addition to Heartbeat Technology, conductivity measurement must be enabled on the device. To do this, go to the‘Conductivity measurement’ parameter on the ‘Process parameters’ menu and select the ‘On’ option.

98

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

10.5.5

Commissioning

Displaying the I/O configuration

The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersin which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed.
Navigation"Setup" menu → I/O configuration‣ I/O configuration
I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers→  99I/O module 1 to n information→  99I/O module 1 to n type→  99

Apply I/O configuration→  99I/O alteration code→  99Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection /User entry

Factory setting

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O • Not used
module.
• 26-27 (I/O 1)• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

I/O module 1 to n information

Shows information of the plugged I/O
module.

• Not plugged• Invalid• Not configurable• Configurable• PROFINET–

I/O module 1 to n typeShows the I/O module type.

• Off• Current output *• Current input *• Status input *• Pulse/frequency/switch
output *• Double pulse output *• Relay output *Off

Apply I/O configuration

Apply parameterization of the freely
configurable I/O module.

• No
• Yes

No

I/O alteration code

Enter the code in order to change the I/O
configuration.

Positive integer

0*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.6

Configuring the current input

The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the current input.

Endress+Hauser

99Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Navigation"Setup" menu → Current input‣ Current input 1 to n
Terminal number→  100

Signal mode→  100

0/4 mA value→  100

20 mA value→  100

Current span

→  100

Failure mode→  100

Failure value→  100

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current input
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode

The measuring device is not
approved for use in thehazardous area with type ofprotection Ex-i.

Select the signal mode for thecurrent input.

• Passive• Active *Active0/4 mA value–Enter 4 mA value.

Signed floating-point
number0

20 mA value–Enter 20 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameterCurrent span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA (4...
20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA NE(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US(3.9...20.8 mA)• 0...20 mA (0...
20.5 mA)

Country-specific:• 4...20 mA NE(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US(3.9...20.8 mA)

Failure mode–

Define input behavior in alarm
condition.

• Alarm• Last valid value• Defined value

Alarm

Failure value

In the Failure modeparameter, the Defined value
option is selected.

Enter value to be used by thedevice if input value fromexternal device is missing.

Signed floating-point
number0*

100

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

10.5.7

Commissioning

Configuring the status input

The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the status input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Status input 1 to n

‣ Status input 1 to n
Assign status input→  101

Terminal number→  101

Active level→  101

Terminal number→  101

Response time status input→  101

Terminal number→  101

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection / User interface /User entry

Factory setting

Assign status input

Select function for the status input.

• Off• Reset totalizer 1• Reset totalizer 2• Reset totalizer 3• Reset all totalizers• Flow override• Zero adjustment

Off

Terminal number

Shows the terminal numbers used by thestatus input module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Active level

Define input signal level at which theassigned function is triggered.

• High• Low

HighResponse time status input

Define the minimum amount of time the
5 to 200 ms
input signal level must be present before theselected function is triggered.

10.5.850 ms

Configuring the current output

The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that haveto be set for configuring the current output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current output‣ Current output 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

101Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Terminal number→  102

Signal mode→  102

Process variable current output→  102

Current range output→  103

Lower range value output→  103

Upper range value output→  103

Fixed current→  103

Damping current output→  103

Failure behavior current output→  103

Failure current→  103

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current output
module.

• Not used
• 26-27 (I/O 1)• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for thecurrent output.

• Active *• Passive *ActiveProcess variable current output–

Select the process variable forthe current output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Electronics
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• HBSI *• Build-up index *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

Volume flow

102

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter

Prerequisite

Commissioning

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting• 4...20 mA NE(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US(3.9...20.8 mA)• 4...20 mA (4...
20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0...
20.5 mA)• Fixed value

Depends on country:• 4...20 mA NE(3.8...20.5 mA)• 4...20 mA US(3.9...20.8 mA)

Current range output–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

Lower range value output

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  103):• 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5
mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Enter lower range value for the Signed floating-point
measured value range.
numberDepends on country:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Upper range value output

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  103):• 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5
mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Enter upper range value forthe measured value range.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Fixed current

The Fixed current option is
selected in the Current spanparameter (→  103).

Defines the fixed output
current.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA

Damping current output

A process variable is selectedin the Assign current output
parameter (→  102) and
one of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  103):• 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5
mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Set reaction time for output
signal to fluctuations in themeasured value.

0.0 to 999.9 s

1.0 s

Failure behavior current output

A process variable is selectedin the Assign current output
parameter (→  102) and
one of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  103):• 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5
mA)• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Min.
• Max.
• Last valid value• Actual value• Fixed value

Max.

Failure current

The Defined value option is
selected in the Failure modeparameter.

Enter current output value inalarm condition.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

103Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

10.5.9Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all theparameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n→  104

Operating mode

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Operating mode

Description
Define the output as a pulse, frequency orswitch output.

Selection• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Factory setting
Pulse

Configuring the pulse output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n104

Operating mode→  105

Terminal number→  105

Signal mode→  105

Assign pulse output→  105

Pulse scaling→  105

Pulse width→  105

Failure mode→  105

Invert output signal→  105

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active *• Passive NE

Passive

Assign pulse output

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter.

Select process variable forpulse output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Off

Pulse scaling

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  104) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  105).

Enter quantity for measured
value at which a pulse is
output.

Positive floating
point number

Depends on country
and nominal
diameter

Pulse width

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  104) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  105).

Define time width of theoutput pulse.

0.05 to 2 000 ms

100 msFailure mode

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  104) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  105).

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• No pulses

No pulses

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Configuring the frequency output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nEndress+Hauser

Operating mode→  106

Terminal number→  106

Signal mode→  106

Assign frequency output→  106

105

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Minimum frequency value→  106

Maximum frequency value→  107

Measuring value at minimum
frequency→  107

Measuring value at maximum
frequency→  107

Failure mode→  107

Failure frequency→  107

Invert output signal→  107

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active *• Passive NE

Passive

Assign frequency output

In the Operating modeparameter (→  104), theFrequency option is selected.

Select process variable forfrequency output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronics
temperature• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• HBSI *• Build-up index *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

Off

Minimum frequency value

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  104)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  106).

Enter minimum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz

0.0 Hz106

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter

Prerequisite

Commissioning

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Maximum frequency value

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  104)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  106).

Enter maximum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz

10 000.0 Hz

Measuring value at minimum
frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  104)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  106).

Enter measured value forminimum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Measuring value at maximum
frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  104)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  106).

Enter measured value for
maximum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Failure mode

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  104)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  106).

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• Defined value• 0 Hz

0 Hz

Failure frequency

In the Operating modeparameter (→  104), theFrequency option is selected,
in the Assign frequency
output parameter (→  106)a process variable is selected,
and in the Failure modeparameter, the Defined value
option is selected.

Enter frequency output value
in alarm condition.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

0.0 HzInvert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

107Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Configuring the switch output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOperating mode→  108

Terminal number→  108

Signal mode→  108

Switch output function→  109

Assign diagnostic behavior→  109

Assign limit→  109

Assign flow direction check→  109

Assign status→  109

Switch-on value→  109

Switch-off value→  109

Switch-on delay→  109

Switch-off delay→  110

Failure mode→  110Invert output signal→  110

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active *• Passive NE

Passive

108

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter

Prerequisite

Commissioning

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Switch output function

The Switch option is selectedin the Operating modeparameter.

Select function for switch
output.

• Off• On• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Status

Off

Assign diagnostic behavior• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theDiagnostic behavior option
is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning

Alarm

Assign limit• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theLimit option is selected.

Select process variable for limit • Off
function.
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronics
temperature• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3

Volume flow

Assign flow direction check• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Flow direction check
option is selected in the
Switch output function
parameter.

Select process variable for flow
direction monitoring.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Assign status• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Status option is
selected in the Switch
output function parameter.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Empty pipe
detection• Low flow cut off• Binary output *• Binary output *• Binary output *• Build-up index *• HBSI limit
exceeded *Empty pipe detection

Switch-on value• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Switch-off value• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Switch-on delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Endress+Hauser

109

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Switch-off delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed

Open

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

*

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.10 Configuring the relay output
The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the relay output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Relay output 1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n

110

Terminal number→  111

Relay output function→  111

Assign flow direction check→  111

Assign limit→  111

Assign diagnostic behavior→  111

Assign status→  111

Switch-off value→  111

Switch-off delay→  111

Switch-on value→  111

Switch-on delay→  111

Failure mode→  111

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the relay output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Relay output function–

Select the function for therelay output.

• Closed• Open• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Status

ClosedAssign flow direction check

The Flow direction check
option is selected in the Relay
output function parameter.

Select process variable for flow
direction monitoring.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Assign limit

The Limit option is selected in
the Relay output function
parameter.

Select process variable for limit • Off
function.
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronics
temperature• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3

Volume flow

Assign diagnostic behavior

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Diagnostic
behavior option is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning

Alarm

Assign status

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Digital Output
option is selected.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Empty pipe
detection• Low flow cut off• Binary output *• Binary output *• Binary output *• HBSI limit
exceeded *Empty pipe detection

Switch-off value

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal(us)/min

Switch-off delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Switch-on value

The Limit option is selected in
the Relay output function
parameter.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal(us)/min

Switch-on delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed

Open*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

111Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

10.5.11 Configuring the low flow cut off
The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat must be set to configure low flow cut off.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Low flow cut off‣ Low flow cut off
Assign process variable→  112On value low flow cutoff→  112Off value low flow cutoff→  112Pressure shock suppression→  112

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Select process variable for low
flow cut off.

• Off
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Positive floatingpoint number

Depends on country
and nominal
diameter

Assign process variable–

On value low flow cutoff

A process variable is selectedEnter on value for low flow cut
in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  112).

Off value low flow cutoff

A process variable is selectedEnter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 %in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  112).

50 %Pressure shock suppression

A process variable is selectedEnter time frame for signal
in the Assign process variable suppression (= active pressure
parameter (→  112).
shock suppression).

0s

112

0 to 100 s

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

10.5.12 Configuring empty pipe detection
The measuring devices are calibrated with water (approx. 500 µS/cm) at the factory.
For liquids with a lower conductivity, it is advisable to perform a new full pipe
adjustment onsite.
The Empty pipe detection submenu contains parameters that must be configured for theconfiguration of empty pipe detection.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Empty pipe detection‣ Empty pipe detection
Empty pipe detection→  113

New adjustment→  113

Progress→  113

Switch point empty pipe detection→  113

Response time empty pipe detection→  113

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Empty pipe detection–

Switch empty pipe detection on • Off
and off.
• On

Off

New adjustment

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Select type of adjustment.

• Cancel• Empty pipe adjust• Full pipe adjust

CancelProgress

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Shows the progress.

• Ok• Busy• Not ok–

Switch point empty pipe detection

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Enter the switch point in % of 0 to 100 %the difference between the two
adjustment values. The lower
the percentage, the earlier thepipe is detected as empty.

Response time empty pipe detection A process variable is selected
Use this function to enter thein the Assign process variable minimum time (hold time) the
parameter (→  113).
signal must be present before
diagnostic message S962
"Empty pipe" is triggered in theevent of a partially filled or
empty measuring pipe.

Endress+Hauser

0 to 100 s

50 %

1s

113

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

10.5.13 Configuring flow damping
The Configure flow damping wizard guides the user systematically through theparameters, depending on the selected scenario:• Configuration of damping for the application
To configure flow damping for the specific requirements of the process application.
• Replace old device
To adopt the flow damping for the new device in the event of a device replacement.
• Restoring factory settings
To restore the factory settings of all the parameters that are relevant for flow damping.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Configure flow damping‣ Configure flow damping

114

Scenario→  115

Old device→  115

CIP filter on→  115

Damping level→  115

Flow change rate

→  115

Application→  115

Pulsating flow

→  115

Flow peaks→  115

Damping level→  115Filter options→  115

Median filter depth→  115

Flow damping→  115

Support ID→  115

Save settings→  115

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection / User interface

Factory setting

Scenario

Select the applicable scenario.

• Replace old device• Configure damping for
application• Restore factory settings

Configure damping for
application

Old device

Select the measuring device to replace.

• Promag 10 (pre-2021)• Promag 50/53• Promag 55 H

Promag 50/53

CIP filter on

Indicate whether the CIP filter was applied
for the device to be replaced.

• No
• Yes

No

Damping level

Select the degree of damping to apply.

• Default• Weak• Strong

Default

Flow change rate

Select the rate at which the flow changes.

• Once a day or less• Once an hour or less• Once a minute or less• Once a second or moreOnce a minute or less

Application

Select the type of application that applies.

• Display flow
• Control loop
• Totalizing• Batching

Display flow

Pulsating flow

Indicate whether the process is characterized • No
by pulsating flow (e.g. due to a displacement • Yespump).

No

Flow peaks

Select the frequency at which flowinterference peaks occur.

• Never• Sporadically• Regularly• Continuously

Never• Fast• Slow• Normal

Normal• Adaptive• Adaptive CIP on• Dynamic• Dynamic CIP on• Binomial• Binomial CIP on

Binomial

Response Time

Filter options

Shows the type of flow filter recommended
for damping.

Median filter depth

Shows median filter depth recommended for 0 to 255
damping.

6

Flow damping

Shows the flow filter depth recommended
for damping.

0 to 15

7

Support ID

If the recommended settings are notsatisfactory: please contact your Endress+Hauser service organization with thesupport ID displayed.

0 to 65 535

0Save settings

Indicate whether to save the recommended
settings.

• Cancel• Save *Cancel• Completed• Aborted

AbortedFilter Wizard result:*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.14 "Build-up index adjustment" wizard
The Build-up index adjustment wizard guides the user systematically through all theparameters that have to be set for the configuration of build-up detection.

Endress+Hauser

115

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Navigation"Expert" menu → Sensor → Build-up index adjustment‣ Build-up index adjustment
Prerequisites→  116

Progress→  116

Build-up index reference value E 1→  116Signal to noise ratio→  116

Build-up index reference value E 2→  116Signal to noise ratio→  116

Build-up index operating mode→  116

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection

Factory setting

Prerequisites

The following conditions must be met before • The sensor is free of buildperforming a build-up index adjustment.
up• The measuring tube iscompletely filled–

Progress

Shows the progress of the process.

0 to 100 %–Build-up index reference value E 1Shows the reference value 'Build-up freesensor' measured for electrode E1.

0 to 1

0.0

Signal to noise ratio

Shows the signal to noise ratio during themeasurement. A value between 1.0 - 2.0 issufficient to excellent.

Signed floating-point number0

Build-up index reference value E 2Shows the reference value 'Build-up freesensor' measured for electrode E2.

0 to 1

0.0

Build-up index operating mode

Select mode of operation for build-up index.

• Off• Slow• Standard• FastOff

116

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

10.6

Commissioning

Advanced settings

The Advanced setup submenu with its submenus contains parameters for specificsettings.
Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
1.

0104-1Main menu
Display language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup

2.

Diagnostic/ ../Setup
Medium selection

3.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX/ ../Setup
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Advanced setup

4.

/ ../Advanced setup
Ent. access code5.

Device tag
Def. access code0092-1****
A0032223-EN

The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device (→ "Supplementary documentation" section).
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup‣ Advanced setup

Endress+HauserEnter access code→  118‣ Sensor adjustment→  118‣ Totalizer 1 to n

→  118‣ Display→  120117

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

10.6.1‣ WLAN settings→  123‣ Electrode cleaning cycle→  125‣ Heartbeat setup→  126‣ Configuration backup→  127‣ Administration→  128

Using the parameter to enter the access code

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Enter access code

Description

User entry

Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters.

10.6.2Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Carrying out a sensor adjustment

The Sensor adjustment submenu contains parameters that pertain to the functionality ofthe sensor.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment‣ Sensor adjustment→  118

Installation direction

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Installation direction

Description
Select sign of flow direction.

10.6.3

Selection• Forward flow
• Reverse flow

Factory setting
Forward flow

Configuring the totalizer

In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu the individual totalizer can be configured.

118

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Totalizer 1 to n

‣ Totalizer 1 to n
Assign process variable→  119

Unit totalizer→  119

Totalizer operation mode→  119

Failure mode→  119

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection

Assign process variable

Select process variable for totalizer.

Unit totalizer

Select the unit for the process variable of the Unit choose list
totalizer.

Country-specific:
• m³
• ft³

Totalizer operation mode

Select totalizer calculation mode.

• Net flow total• Forward flow total• Reverse flow total• Last valid value

Net flow total

Failure mode

Define the totalizer behavior in the event ofa device alarm.

• Stop• Actual value• Last valid value

Actual value

Endress+Hauser• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Factory setting
Volume flow

119Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

10.6.4

Carrying out additional display configurations

In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configurationof the local display.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Display‣ Display120

Format display→  121

Value 1 display→  1210% bargraph value 1→  121

100% bargraph value 1→  121

Decimal places 1→  121

Value 2 display→  121

Decimal places 2→  121

Value 3 display→  1210% bargraph value 3→  121

100% bargraph value 3→  122

Decimal places 3→  122

Value 4 display→  122

Decimal places 4→  122

Display language→  122

Display interval→  122

Display damping→  122

Header→  122

Header text

→  122

Separator→  123

Backlight→  123

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Format display

A local display is provided.

Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values

1 value, max. size

Value 1 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Electronics
temperature• HBSI *• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• Build-up index *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

Volume flow

0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Decimal places 1

A measured value is specified
in the Value 1 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Value 2 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  121)

None

Decimal places 2

A measured value is specified
in the Value 2 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  121)None

0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Endress+Hauser

121Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number0

Decimal places 3

A measured value is specified
in the Value 3 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 1 display
parameter(→  121)

None

Decimal places 4

A measured value is specified
in the Value 4 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Display language

A local display is provided.

Set display language.

• English• Deutsch• Français• Español• Italiano• Nederlands• Portuguesa• Polski• русский язык(Russian)• Svenska• Türkçe• 中文 (Chinese)• 日本語 (Japanese)• 한국어 (Korean)• tiếng Việt(Vietnamese)• čeština (Czech)

English(alternatively, theordered language ispreset in the device)

Display interval

A local display is provided.

Set time measured values areshown on display if display
alternates between values.

1 to 10 s

5s

Display damping

A local display is provided.

Set display reaction time tofluctuations in the measured
value.

0.0 to 999.9 s

0.0 s

Header

A local display is provided.

Select header contents on local • Device tag
display.
• Free text

Device tag

Header text

The Free text option is
selected in the Header
parameter.

Enter display header text.

------------

122

Max. 12 characters,such as letters,
numbers or special
characters (e.g. @,%, /)Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Separator

A local display is provided.

Backlight

One of the following
Switch the local display
conditions is met:
backlight on and off.
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option F "4-line,
illum.; touch control"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option G "4-line,
illum.; touch control+WLAN"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option O "Remote
display 4-line illuminated;
10m/30ft cable; touch
control"*

Select decimal separator for
displaying numerical values.

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting• . (point)• , (comma). (point)• Disable• Enable

EnableVisibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.5WLAN configuration

The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersthat have to be set for the WLAN configuration.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → WLAN settings‣ WLAN settings

Endress+Hauser

WLAN→  124WLAN mode→  124

SSID name→  124

Network security→  124

Security identification→  124

User name→  124WLAN password→  124WLAN IP address→  124WLAN passphrase→  124

Assign SSID name→  124

SSID name→  124

123

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Connection state→  125

Received signal strength→  125

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

WLAN

–

Switch WLAN on and off.

• Disable• Enable

EnableWLAN mode–

Select WLAN mode.

• WLAN accesspoint• WLAN Client

WLAN access point

SSID name

The client is activated.

Enter the user-defined SSID
name (max. 32 characters).

––

Network security–

Select the security type of the
WLAN network.

• Unsecured• WPA2-PSK• EAP-PEAP withMSCHAPv2 *• EAP-PEAP
MSCHAPv2 noserver authentic. *• EAP-TLS *WPA2-PSK

Security identification–

Select security settings anddownload these settings via
menu Data management >Security > WLAN.

• Trusted issuer
certificate• Device certificate• Device private key–

User name–Enter user name.

––

WLAN password–

Enter WLAN password.

––

WLAN IP address–Enter IP address of the WLAN
interface of the device.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (inthe particular octet)

192.168.1.212

WLAN passphrase

The WPA2-PSK option is
selected in the Security typeparameter.

Enter the network key (8 to 32 8 to 32-digit
characters).
character string
comprising numbers,
The network key
supplied with the device letters and special
characters (without
should be changed
spaces)during commissioningSerial number of themeasuring device(e.g. L100A802000)

for security reasons.
Assign SSID name–

Select which name will be used • Device tag
for SSID: device tag or user• User-defined
defined name.

User-defined

SSID name• The User-defined option is
selected in the Assign SSID
name parameter.
• The WLAN access point
option is selected in the
WLAN mode parameter.

Enter the user-defined SSID
name (max. 32 characters).

EH_devicedesignation_last 7
digits of the serial
number (e.g.
EH_Promag_300_A
802000)124Max. 32-digit
character string
comprising numbers,
The user-defined SSID
letters and specialname may only be
assigned once. If the SSID charactersname is assigned morethan once, the devices
can interfere with one
another.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Connection state–

Displays the connection status. • Connected• Not connected

Not connected

Received signal strength–

Shows the received signal
strength.

High

*

• Low
• Medium• HighVisibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.6

Performing electrode cleaning

The Electrode cleaning cycle submenu contains the parameters that must be set for theconfiguration of electrode cleaning.
The submenu is only available if the device was ordered with electrode cleaning.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Electrode cleaning cycle‣ Electrode cleaning cycle
Electrode cleaning cycle→  125

ECC duration→  125

ECC recovery time→  125

ECC interval→  126

ECC polarity→  126

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Electrode cleaning cycle

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Switch electrode cleaning on or • Off
off.
• On

On

ECC duration

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Specify the duration of the0.01 to 30 s
cleaning phase of the cycle.
Diag. msg. no. 530 is displayed
until the cleaning phase andrecovery phase are complete.

2s

ECC recovery time

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Specify the maximum
timespan after the cleaningphase for recovery before
measurement resumes during
which the output signal values
are frozen.

60 s

Endress+Hauser

1 to 600 s

125Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

ECC interval

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Specify the interval between
one cleaning cycle and thenext.

0.5 to 168 h

0.5 h

ECC polarity

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Select the polarity of theelectrode cleaning circuit.

• Positive• Negative

Depends on theelectrode material:• Tantalum:
Negative option• Platinum, Alloy
C22, stainlesssteel: Positive
option10.6.7

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Performing Heartbeat basic setup

Heartbeat setup submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters thatcan be used for the Heartbeat basic setup.
The wizard only appears if the device has the Heartbeat Verification +Monitoring
application package.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Heartbeat setup‣ Heartbeat setup‣ Heartbeat base settings→  126"Heartbeat base settings" submenu
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Heartbeat setup → Heartbeat base settings‣ Heartbeat base settings

126

Plant operator (2754)→  127

Location (2755)→  127

Partially filled pipe (6465)→  127

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry / Selection

Factory setting

Plant operator

Enter the plant operator.

Max. 32 characters such as
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /)–LocationEnter the location.

Max. 32 characters such as
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /)–Partially filled pipe

Indicate, if the measuring tube is partiallyfilled during the verification process in order
to avoid evaluating the EPD electrode cable.

• No
• Yes

No

10.6.8Configuration management

After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous
device configuration. The device configuration is managed via the Configuration
management parameter.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup‣ Configuration backup
Operating time→  127

Last backup→  127

Configuration management→  127

Backup state→  128

Comparison result→  128

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection

Factory setting

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in
operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Last backup

Shows when the last data backup was saved
to HistoROM backup.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Configuration management

Select action for managing the device data in • Cancel
the HistoROM backup.
• Execute backup• Restore *• Compare *• Clear backup data

Endress+Hauser

Cancel127

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection

Factory setting

Backup stateShows the current status of data saving or
restoring.

• None• Backup in progress• Restoring in progress• Delete in progress• Compare in progress• Restoring failed• Backup failed

None

Comparison result

Comparison of current device data with
HistoROM backup.

• Settings identical• Settings not identical• No backup available• Backup settings corrupt• Check not done
• Dataset incompatible

Check not done*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter
Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Execute backup

A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM
backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter dataof the device.

RestoreThe last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device
memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes thetransmitter data of the device.

CompareThe device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current
device configuration of the HistoROM backup.

Clear backup data

The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of thedevice.

HistoROM backup
A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM.
While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local
display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.

10.6.9Using parameters for device administration

The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat can be used for device administration purposes.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration‣ Administration

128‣ Define access code→  129‣ Reset access code→  129

Device reset→  130

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

Using the parameter to define the access code
Complete this wizard to specify an access code for the Maintenance role.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code

‣ Define access code
Define access code→  129

Confirm access code→  129

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry

Define access code

Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configurationof the device against unintentional changes.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Confirm access code

Confirm the entered access code.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Using the parameter to reset the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Reset access code

‣ Reset access code
Operating time→  129

Reset access code→  129

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / User entry

Factory setting

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in
operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Reset access code

Reset access code to factory settings.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters

0x00



For a reset code, contact yourEndress+Hauser service organization.

The reset code can only be entered via:
• Web browser• DeviceCare, FieldCare (via CDI-RJ45
service interface)• Fieldbus

Using the parameter to reset the device
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration

Endress+Hauser

129

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device reset*

Description
Reset the device configuration - either
entirely or in part - to a defined state.

Selection• Cancel• To delivery settings• Restart device• Restore S-DAT backup *Factory setting
CancelVisibility depends on order options or device settings

10.7

Simulation

Via the Simulation submenu, it is possible to simulate various process variables in theprocess and the device alarm mode and verify downstream signal chains (switching valvesor closed-control loops). The simulation can be performed without a real measurement (noflow of medium through the device).
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Simulation‣ Simulation

130

Assign simulation process variable→  131

Process variable value→  131

Current input 1 to n simulation→  132

Value current input 1 to n

→  132

Status input 1 to n simulation→  132

Input signal level 1 to n

→  132

Current output 1 to n simulation→  131

Current output value→  131Frequency output 1 to n simulation→  131Frequency output 1 to n value→  131

Pulse output simulation 1 to n

→  131

Pulse value 1 to n

→  131

Switch output simulation 1 to n

→  131

Switch state 1 to n

→  131

Relay output 1 to n simulation→  131

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

Switch state 1 to n

→  131

Device alarm simulation→  132

Diagnostic event category→  132

Diagnostic event simulation→  132

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Assign simulation process variable–

Select a process variable forthe simulation process that is
activated.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *Off

Process variable value

A process variable is selectedin the Assign simulation
process variable parameter(→  131).

Enter the simulation value forthe selected process variable.

Depends on theprocess variableselected0

Current output 1 to n simulation–

Switch the simulation of thecurrent output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Current output value

In the Current output 1 to nsimulation parameter, the On
option is selected.

Enter the current value forsimulation.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

3.59 mA

Frequency output 1 to n simulation

In the Operating modeparameter, the Frequency
option is selected.

Switch the simulation of thefrequency output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Frequency output 1 to n value

In the Frequency simulation
1 to n parameter, the On
option is selected.

Enter the frequency value forthe simulation.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

0.0 HzPulse output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating modeparameter, the Pulse option is
selected.

Set and switch off the pulse
output simulation.

• Off• Fixed value• Down-counting
value

Off

For Fixed value option:
 Pulsewidth parameter(→  105) defines thepulse width of the pulses
output.

Pulse value 1 to n

In the Pulse output
simulation 1 to n parameter,
the Down-counting value
option is selected.

Enter the number of pulses for
simulation.

0 to 65 535

0

Switch output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch option
is selected.

Switch the simulation of theswitch output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Switch state 1 to n–

Select the status of the status
output for the simulation.

• Open• Closed

Open

Relay output 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of the relay
output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Switch state 1 to n

The On option is selected in
the Switch output simulation
1 to n parameter parameter.

Select status of the relay
output for the simulation.

• Open• Closed

Open

Endress+Hauser

131Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Device alarm simulation–

Switch the device alarm on and • Off
off.
• On

Off

Diagnostic event category–

Select a diagnostic event
category.

• Sensor• Electronics• Configuration• ProcessProcess

Diagnostic event simulation–

Select a diagnostic event tosimulate this event.

• Off• Diagnostic event
picklist (depends
on the category
selected)

Off

Current input 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of thecurrent input on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Value current input 1 to n

In the Current input 1 to nsimulation parameter, the On
option is selected.

Enter the current value forsimulation.

0 to 22.5 mA

0 mA

Status input 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of the status • Off
input on and off.
• On

Input signal level 1 to n

In the Status input simulation Select the signal level for theparameter, the On option issimulation of the status input.
selected.

*• High
• Low

Off
High

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.8

Protecting settings from unauthorized access

The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of themeasuring device from unintentional modification:• Protect access to parameters via access code →  132• Protect access to local operation via key locking →  66
• Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch →  134

10.8.1

Write protection via access code

The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows:• Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are writeprotected and their values can no longer be changed.
• Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring
device configuration.
• Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as
are the parameters for the measuring device configuration.
Defining the access code via local display
1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  129).

2.

Define a max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special
characters as the access code.

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  129) toconfirm the code.
 The -symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters.

The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is not pressedfor 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view. The device locks the write-protected

132

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Commissioning

parameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips back to the operational display mode
from the navigation and editing view.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  65.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via the local display→  65 is indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation→ Access status
Parameters which can always be modified via the local display
Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write
protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be
modified, even if the other parameters are locked.

Language

Parameters for configuring
the local display

Parameters for configuring
the totalizer↓↓

Format display

Control Totalizer

Contrast display

Preset value

Display interval

Reset all totalizers

Defining the access code via the Web browser
1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  129).

2.

Define a max. 16-digit numeric code as an access code.

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  129) toconfirm the code.
 The Web browser switches to the login page.
If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  65.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via Web browser isindicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → AccessstatusResetting the access code
If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory
setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code canthen be defined again afterwards.
Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus
You can only obtain a reset code from your local Endress+Hauser service organization.
The code must be calculated explicitly for every device.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Note down the serial number of the device.

2.

Read off the Operating time parameter.

3.

Contact the local Endress+Hauser service organization and tell them the serial
number and the operating time.
 Get the calculated reset code.

133

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

4.

Enter the reset code in the Reset access code parameter (→  129).
 The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined→  132.
For IT security reasons, the calculated reset code is only valid for 96 hours from thespecified operating time and for the specific serial number. If you cannot return to thedevice within 96 hours, you should either increase the operating time you read out by
a few days or switch off the device.

10.8.2

Write protection via write protection switch

Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows the user tolock write access to the entire operating menu - apart from the "Contrast display"parameter.
The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception"Contrast display" parameter):• Via local display• Via PROFINET protocol
1.
OFF ON
1
2
3
4

A0029630

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON
position enables hardware write protection.
 In the Locking status parameter, the Hardware locked option is displayed→  135. In addition, on the local display the  symbol appears in front of theparameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view.

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX

XX
A00294252.

134

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the OFF
position (factory setting) disables hardware write protection.
 No option is displayed in the Locking status parameter →  135. On the local
display, the  symbol disappears from in front of the parameters in the headerof the operational display and in the navigation view.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operation

11

Operation

11.1

Reading off the device locking status

Device active write protection: Locking status parameter
Operation → Locking status
Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter
Options

Description

None

The access authorization displayed in the Access status parameter applies→  65. Only appears on local display.

Hardware locked

The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write
access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool) →  134.

Temporarily locked

Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal
processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset, etc.). Once theinternal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once
again.

11.2

Adjusting the operating language

Detailed information:• To configure the operating language →  91
• For information on the operating languages supported by the measuring device→  208

11.3

Configuring the display

Detailed information:• On the basic settings for the local display• On the advanced settings for the local display →  120

11.4

Reading measured values

With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values‣ Measured values

Endress+Hauser‣ Process variables→  136‣ Totalizer→  137‣ Input values→  138‣ Output values→  139

135

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

11.4.1"Process variables" submenu

The Process variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for each process variable.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Process variables‣ Process variables
Volume flow

→  136

Mass flow→  136

Corrected volume flow

→  136

Flow velocity→  136

Conductivity→  136

Corrected conductivity→  137

Temperature→  137

Density→  137

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Volume flow

Prerequisite–

Description
Displays the volume flow that iscurrently measured.

User interface
Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from: Volume flow
unit parameter (→  96)
Mass flow–

Displays the mass flow that is currently
calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Mass flow
unit parameter (→  96).
Corrected volume flow–

Displays the corrected volume flow thatis currently calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from: Correctedvolume flow unit parameter (→  97)
Flow velocity–

Displays the flow velocity that iscurrently calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberConductivity–

Displays the conductivity that iscurrently measured.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Conductivity
unit parameter (→  96).

136

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter
Corrected conductivity

TemperatureDensity

Operation

Prerequisite

Description

User interface

One of the following conditions is met:
• Order code for "Sensor option", option
CI "Medium temperature
measurement"or• The temperature is read into theflowmeter from an external device.

Displays the conductivity that iscurrently corrected.

Positive floating-point
numberOne of the following conditions is met:
• Order code for "Sensor option", option
CI "Medium temperature
measurement"or• The temperature is read into theflowmeter from an external device.

Displays the temperature that iscurrently calculated.

–

Displays the current fixed density or
Signed floating-point
density read in from an external device. number

Dependency
The unit is taken from: Conductivity
unit parameter (→  96)

Positive floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from: Temperatureunit parameter (→  96)

Dependency
The unit is taken from the Density unit
parameter.

11.4.2

Totalizer

The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every totalizer.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Totalizer‣ Totalizer
Assign process variable 1 to n

→  137

Totalizer 1 to n value→  137

Totalizer 1 to n status→  137

Totalizer 1 to n status (Hex)→  137

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection / User interface

Factory setting

Assign process variable 1 to n

Select process variable for totalizer.

• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Volume flow

Totalizer 1 to n value

Shows the totalizer value reported to thecontroller for further processing.

Signed floating-point number

0l

Totalizer 1 to n status

Shows the status of the totalizer value
reported to the controller for further
processing ('Good', 'Uncertain', 'Bad').

• Good• Uncertain
• Bad

Good

Totalizer 1 to n status (Hex)Shows the status of the totalizer value
reported to the controller for further
processing (Hex).

0 to 255

128

Endress+Hauser

137

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

11.4.3"Input values" submenu

The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values‣ Input values‣ Current input 1 to n

→  138‣ Status input 1 to n

→  138

Input values of current input
The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current input.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Current input 1 to n

‣ Current input 1 to n
Measured values 1 to n

→  138

Measured current 1 to n

→  138

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Measured values 1 to n

Displays the current input value.

Signed floating-point number

Measured current 1 to n

Displays the current value of the current input.

0 to 22.5 mA

Input values of status input
The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every status input.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Status input 1 to n

‣ Status input 1 to n
Value status input138→  139

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operation

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Value status input

Description
Shows the current input signal level.

11.4.4User interface• High• Low

Output values

The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values‣ Output values‣ Current output 1 to n

→  139‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  139‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  140

1 to nOutput values of current output
The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Value current output 1 to n

‣ Current output 1 to n
Output current→  139

Measured current→  139

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Output current

Displays the current value currently calculated for the current
output.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

Measured current

Displays the current value currently measured for the current
output.

0 to 30 mA

Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output
The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed
to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output.

Endress+Hauser

139

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOutput frequency→  140

Pulse output 1 to n

→  140

Switch state→  140

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface

Output frequency

In the Operating mode parameter, theFrequency option is selected.

Displays the value currently measured
for the frequency output.

Pulse output 1 to n

The Pulse option is selected in the
Displays the pulse frequency currently
Operating mode parameter parameter. output.

Positive floating-point
number

Switch state

The Switch option is selected in the
Operating mode parameter.

• Open• Closed

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

Displays the current switch output
status.

Output values for relay output
The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every relay output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Relay output 1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n
Switch state→  140

Switch cycles→  140

Max. switch cycles number→  140

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Switch stateShows the current relay switch status.

• Open• Closed

Switch cycles

Shows number of all performed switch cycles.

Positive integer

Max. switch cycles number

Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles.

Positive integer

140

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

11.5

Operation

Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions

The following are available for this purpose:• Basic settings using theSetup menu (→  92)• Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu (→  117)

11.6

Performing a totalizer reset

The totalizers are reset in the Operation submenu:• Control Totalizer• Reset all totalizers
Navigation"Operation" menu → Totalizer handling‣ Totalizer handling
Totalizer 1 to n control (11101–1 to n)→  141

Preset value 1 to n (11108–1 to n)→  141

Reset all totalizers (2806)→  141

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection / User entry

Factory setting

Totalizer 1 to n control

Operate the totalizer.

• Reset + hold
• Preset + hold
• Hold• Totalize

Totalize

Preset value 1 to nSpecify start value for totalizer.

Signed floating-point number

0l

Reset all totalizers

Reset all totalizers to 0 and start.

• Cancel• Reset + totalize

Cancel

11.6.1

Function scope of "Control Totalizer" parameter

Options

Description

Totalize

The totalizer is started or continues running.

Reset + holdPreset + hold

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0.
1)

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value
from the Preset value parameter.

Reset + totalize
Preset + totalize
Hold
1)

Endress+Hauser

The totalizer is reset to 0 and the totaling process is restarted.
1)

The totalizer is set to the defined start value in the Preset value parameter and thetotaling process is restarted.
Totalizing is stopped.

Visible depending on the order options or device settings

141

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

11.6.2Function scope of the "Reset all totalizers" parameter

Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Reset + totalize

Resets all totalizers to 0 and restarts the totaling process. This deletes all the flow
values previously totalized.

11.7

Show data logging

The Extended HistoROM application package must be enabled in the device (order
option) for the Data logging submenu to appear. This contains all the parameters for themeasured value history.
Data logging is also available via:
• Plant Asset Management Tool FieldCare →  77.
• Web browser
Function scope• A total of 1000 measured values can be stored• 4 logging channels• Adjustable logging interval for data logging• Measured value trend for each logging channel displayed in the form of a chart/ ../XXXXXXXX
175.7740.69 l/h
-100s

0A0034352• x-axis: depending on the number of channels selected displays 250 to 1000 measured
values of a process variable.
• y-axis: displays the approximate measured value span and constantly adapts this to theongoing measurement.
If the length of the logging interval or the assignment of the process variables to thechannels is changed, the content of the data logging is deleted.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Data logging‣ Data logging

142

Assign channel 1→  143

Assign channel 2→  143

Assign channel 3→  143

Assign channel 4→  144

Logging interval→  144

Clear logging data

→  144

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operation

Data logging→  144

Logging delay→  144

Data logging control→  144

Data logging status→  144

Entire logging duration→  144

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Assign channel 1

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Assign process variable tologging channel.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronics
temperature• Current output 1 *• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Noise *• Coil current shot
time *• Referenceelectrode potential
against PE *• HBSI *• Build-up index *• Test point 1• Test point 2• Test point 3

Off

Assign channel 2

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Assign a process variable tologging channel.

For the picklist, see
the Assign channel
1 parameter(→  143)

Off

Assign a process variable tologging channel.

For the picklist, see
the Assign channel
1 parameter(→  143)

Off

software options
 The
currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.
Assign channel 3

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.
software options
 The
currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Endress+Hauser

143

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Parameter

Assign channel 4

Prerequisite

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Assign a process variable tologging channel.

For the picklist, see
the Assign channel
1 parameter(→  143)

Off

software options
 The
currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.
Logging interval

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Define the logging interval fordata logging. This value
defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

0.1 to 3 600.0 s

1.0 s

Clear logging data

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Clear the entire logging data.

• Cancel• Clear data

CancelData logging–

Select the type of data logging.

• Overwriting• Not overwriting

Overwriting

Logging delay

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Enter the time delay formeasured value logging.

0 to 999 h

0h

Data logging control

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Start and stop measured value
logging.

• None• Delete + start• StopNone

Data logging status

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Displays the measured value
logging status.

• Done• Delay active• Active• Stopped

Done

Entire logging duration

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Displays the total logging
duration.

Positive floatingpoint number

0s

*

144

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.1

General troubleshooting

For local display
Error

Possible causes

RemedyLocal display dark and no output
signals

Supply voltage does not match thatspecified on the nameplate.

Apply the correct supply voltage .

Local display dark and no output
signals

The polarity of the supply voltage is Correct the polarity.
wrong.

Local display dark and no output
signals

No contact between connecting
cables and terminals.

Check the connection of the cables
and correct if necessary.

Local display dark and no output
signals

Terminals are not plugged into the
I/O electronics module correctly.
Terminals are not plugged into themain electronics module correctly.

Check terminals.

Local display dark and no output
signals

I/O electronics module is defective.
Main electronics module isdefective.

Order spare part →  182.

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

Display is set too bright or too dark. • Set the display brighter bysimultaneously pressing  + .
• Set the display darker bysimultaneously pressing  + .

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

The cable of the display module isnot plugged in correctly.

Insert the plug correctly into themain electronics module anddisplay module.

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

Display module is defective.

Order spare part →  182.

Backlighting of local display is red

Diagnostic event with "Alarm"
diagnostic behavior has occurred.

Take remedial measures →  155

Text on local display appears in aforeign language and cannot be
understood.

Incorrect operating language isconfigured.

1. Press 2 s  +  ("homeposition").
2. Press .
3. Set the desired language in the
Display language parameter(→  122).

Message on local display:"Communication Error""Check Electronics"

Communication between thedisplay module and the electronics
is interrupted.

• Check the cable and theconnector between the mainelectronics module and display
module.
• Order spare part →  182.

Possible causes

Remedial action

Main electronics module isdefective.

Order spare part →  182.

For output signals
Error
Signal output outside the valid
range

Endress+Hauser

Device shows correct value on local Parametrization errors
display, but signal output isincorrect, though in the valid range.

Check parameterization and correctit.

Device measures incorrectly.

1. Check and correct parameter
configuration.
2. Observe limit values specified inthe "Technical Data".

Configuration error or device isoperated outside the application.

145

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

For access
ProblemPossible causes

RemedyNo write access to parameters.

Hardware write protection is enabled.

Set the write protection switch on the mainelectronics module to the OFF position→  134.

No write access to parameters.

Current user role has limited accessauthorization.

1. Check user role →  65.
2. Enter correct customer-specific access code→  65.

No connection to web server.

Web server is disabled.

Using the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare" operating
tool, check whether the Web server of themeasuring device is enabled, and enable it ifnecessary→  73.

Incorrect settings for the Ethernet interface ofthe computer.

1. Check the properties of the Internet protocol(TCP/IP) →  69→  69.
2. Check the network settings with the IT
manager.

Incorrect WLAN access data.

• Check WLAN network status.
• Log on to the device again using WLAN
access data.
• Check that WLAN is enabled on themeasuring device and operating device→  69.

WLAN communication is disabled.

–

Not connecting to web server, FieldCare or
DeviceCare.

No WLAN network available.

• Check if WLAN reception is present: LED on
display module is lit blue
• Check if WLAN connection is enabled: LED on
display module flashes blue
• Switch on instrument function.

Network connection not present or unstable.

WLAN network is weak.

• Operating device is outside of reception range:
Check network status on operating device.
• To improve network performance, use an
external WLAN antenna.

Parallel WLAN and Ethernet communication.

• Check network settings.
• Temporarily enable only the WLAN as aninterface.

Data transfer is active.

Wait until data transfer or current action isfinished.

Connection lost

1. Check cable connection and power supply.
2. Refresh the Web browser and restart if
necessary.

No connection to web server.

Web browser is frozen and operation no longer
possible.

Content of web browser is incomplete or difficult Not using optimum version of Web server.
to read.

1. Use the correct Web browser version→  67.
2. Clear the Web browser cache and restart the
Web browser.

Unsuitable view settings.

Change the font size/display ratio of the Webbrowser.

No or incomplete display of contents in the webbrowser.

• JavaScript is not enabled• JavaScript cannot be enabled

1. Enable JavaScript.
2. Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.X.XX/servlet/
basic.html as the IP address.

Operation with FieldCare or DeviceCare is notpossible via CDI-RJ45 service interface (port
8000).

Firewall of computer or network is preventing
communication.

Depending on the settings of the firewall usedon the computer or in the network, the firewall
must be adapted or disabled to allow FieldCare/
DeviceCare access.

Flashing of firmware with FieldCare or
DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service interface (viaport 8000 or TFTP ports) is not possible.

Firewall of computer or network is preventing
communication.

Depending on the settings of the firewall usedon the computer or in the network, the firewall
must be adapted or disabled to allow FieldCare/
DeviceCare access.

146

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

For system integration
Error

Possible causes

The PROFINET device name is not
displayed correctly and contains
coding.

A device name containing one ormore underscores has been
specified via the automation
system.

RemedySpecify a correct device name(without underscores) via theautomation system.

12.2

Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes

12.2.1

Transmitter

Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status.

1 2 3 4 5A0029629

1
2
3
4
5

Supply voltage
Device status
Flashing/network status
Port 1 active: PROFINET with Ethernet-APL
Port 2 active: service interface (CDI)

LED
1

2

3

Supply voltage

Device status/module
status (normal
operation)

Color

Meaning

Off

Supply voltage is off or too low.

Green

Supply voltage is ok.

Off

Firmware error

Green

Device status is ok.

Flashing green

Device is not configured.

Flashing red

A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic
behavior has occurred.

Red

A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior
has occurred.

Flashing red/green

The device restarts/self-test.

Flashing/network status Green
Flashing green

Cyclic data exchange is active.
Following request from automation system:
Flash frequency: 1 Hz (flash functionality: 500 ms
on, 500 ms off)
If no "Name of Station" is defined:• Flash frequency: 4 Hz
• Display: no "Name of Station" available.

Endress+HauserRed

IP address is available but there is no connection to
the automation system

Flashing red

Cyclic data exchange was active but the connection
was disconnected:
Flash frequency: 3 Hz

147

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

LED
4

5

148

Port 1 active:
PROFINET with
Ethernet-APL
Port 2 active:
Service interface (CDIRJ45)

Color

MeaningOff

Not connected or no connection established.

White

Connection available, no active communication

Flashing white

Connection with active communicationOff

Not connected or no connection established.

Amber

Connection available but no activity.

Flashing amber

Activity present.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.3

Diagnostic information on local display

12.3.1

Diagnostic message

Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as adiagnostic message in alternation with the operational display.
Operational display in alarm condition

Diagnostic message

2 1

XXXXXXXXX

S

20.50

S801

3
4

Supply voltage

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

i

Menu

5
A0029426-EN

1
2
3
4
5

Status signal
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Short text
Operating elements

If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of thediagnostic event with the highest priority is shown.
Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu:• Via parameter →  174• Via submenus →  175
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M= Maintenance Required
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.

Endress+Hauser

149

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic behavior
SymbolMeaning
Alarm• Measurement is interrupted.
• Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition.
• A diagnostic message is generated.
Warning
Measurement is resumed. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic
message is generated.

Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Operating elements
Key

MeaningPlus key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the message about remedy information.
Enter key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the operating menu.

150

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

12.3.2

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Calling up remedial measuresS

XXXXXXXXX

20.50

S801
Supply voltage
i

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

Menu

1.

1

Diagnostic list
Diagnostics 1

S

S801 Supply voltage

Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
2.
2
4
6

Supply voltage(ID:203)
S801 0d00h02m25s
Increase supply voltage

35

3.
A0029431-EN

 25

Message for remedial measures

1
2
3
4
5
6

Diagnostic information
Short text
Service ID
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Operation time when error occurred
Remedial measures

1.

The user is in the diagnostic message.
Press  ( symbol).
 The Diagnostic list submenu opens.

2.

Select the desired diagnostic event with  or  and press  .
 The message about the remedial measures opens.

3.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message about the remedial measures closes.

The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the
Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter.
1.

Press .
 The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message for the remedial measures closes.

12.4

Diagnostic information in the Web browser

12.4.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on thehome page once the user has logged on.

Endress+Hauser

151

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

1

2

3
A0031056

1
2
3

Status area with status signal
Diagnostic information
Remedial measures with service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter →  174• Via submenu →  175
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in the service mode (during a simulation, for example).
Out of specification
The device is being operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.

The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107.

12.4.2

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event andthe related diagnostic information.

12.5

Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare

12.5.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of theoperating tool once the connection has been established.
152

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

1
Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Xxxxxxx

Status signal:

XxxxxxDiagnostics 1:

P

Function check (C)C485 Simu...

P

Remedy information:

Deactivate...

P

Access status tooling:

Mainenance+Operation

+

Setup

+

Diagnostics+

ExpertFailure (F)2Function check (C)Diagnostics 1:

C485 Simulation measured vari...

Remedy information:

Deactivate Simulation (Service...

Out of spezification (S)3Maintenance required (M)A0021799-EN

1
2
3

Status area with status signal →  149
Diagnostics information →  150
Remedial measures with service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter →  174• Via submenu →  175
Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.

12.5.2

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly:• On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information.
• In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.
The user is in the Diagnostics menu.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Call up the desired parameter.

2.

On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter.
 A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.

153

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

12.6

Adapting the diagnostic information

12.6.1

Adapting the diagnostic behavior

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at thefactory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the
Diagnostic behavior submenu.
Expert → System → Diagnostic handling → Diagnostic behavior
Available diagnostic behaviors
The following diagnostic behaviors can be assigned:
Diagnostic behavior

Description

Alarm

The device stops measurement. The totalizers assume the defined alarm
condition. A diagnostic message is generated.

Warning

The device continues to measure. Measured value output via PROFINET andtotalizers are not affected. A diagnostic message is generated.

Logbook entry only

The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is only displayed in
the Event logbook submenu (Event list submenu) and is not displayed inalternating sequence with the operational display.

Off

The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated orentered.

Displaying the measured value status
If modules with input data (e.g. Analog Input module, Discrete Input module, Totalizer
module, Heartbeat module) are configured for cyclic data transmission, the measured
value status is coded as per PROFINET PA Profile 4 Specification and transmitted alongwith the measured value to the PROFINET Controller via the status byte. The status byte is
split into three segments: Quality, Quality Substatus and Limits.

Measuring value

Coding(hex)
Byte 5

Quality

Quality Substatus

Limits
A0032228-EN

 26

Structure of the status byte

The content of the status byte depends on the configured failure mode in the individualfunction block. Depending on which failure mode has been configured, status informationin accordance with PROFINET PA Profile Specification 4 is transmitted to the the
PROFINET with Ethernet-APL controller via the status byte status information. The twobits for the limits always have the value 0.

154

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Supported status information
StatusCoding (hex)

BAD - Maintenance alarm

0x24 to 0x27

BAD - Process related

0x28 to 0x2B

BAD - Function check

0x3C to 0x3F

UNCERTAIN - Initial value

0x4C to 0x4F

UNCERTAIN - Maintenance demanded

0x68 to 0x6B

UNCERTAIN - Process related

0x78 to 0x7B

GOOD - OK

0x80 to 0x83

GOOD - Maintenance required

0xA4 to 0xA7

GOOD - Maintenance demanded

0xA8 to 0xAB

GOOD - Function check

0xBC to 0xBF

12.7

Overview of diagnostic information

The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables affected
increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages.
In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the diagnostic behavior can bechanged. Adapting the diagnostic information →  154

12.7.1

Diagnostic of sensor

Diagnostic information
No.

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check sensor cable and sensor
2. Execute Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

043 Sensor 1 short circuit detected
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Remedy instructions

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning1)

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

082 Data storage inconsistent

Check module connections

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

155

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

083 Memory content inconsistent

1. Restart device
2. Restore S-DAT data
3. Replace S-DAT

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

Warning• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check if external magnetic interference
is present
2. Check flow value
3. Replace sensor• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

168 Build-up limit exceeded

Clean measuring tube

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check grounding conditions
2. Deactivate conductivity measurement• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

169 Conductivity measurement failed

156

Influenced measured
variables

Remedy instructions

Short text

143 HBSI limit exceeded

1)

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Check ambient and process temperature• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

170 Coil resistance faulty
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

180 Temperature sensor defective

1. Check sensor connections
2. Replace sensor cable or sensor
3. Turn off temperature measurement

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check sensor cable and sensor
2. Execute Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

181 Sensor connection faulty
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

12.7.2

Diagnostic of electronic

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

201 Electronics faulty

1. Restart device
2. Replace electronics

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

157

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

242 Firmware incompatible

1. Check firmware version
2. Flash or replace electronic module

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check electronic modules
2. Check if correct modules are available(e.g. NEx, Ex)
3. Replace electronic modules• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check or replace connection cablebetween sensor electronic module(ISEM) and main electronics
2. Check or replace ISEM or mainelectronics

Remedy instructions

Short text

270 Main electronics defective

1. Restart device
2. Replace main electronic module

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

262 Module connection interrupted

Influenced measured
variables

Remedy instructions

Short text

252 Module incompatible

158

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

271 Main electronics faulty

1. Restart device
2. Replace main electronic module

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

272 Main electronics faulty

Restart device

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

273 Main electronics defective

1. Pay attention to display emergency
operation
2. Replace main electronics

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

275 I/O module defective

Change I/O module

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

159

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Remedy instructions

Short text

276 I/O module faulty

1. Restart device
2. Change I/O module

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Restart device

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

302 Device verification active

Device verification active, please wait.

Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Warning• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

303 I/O 1 to n configuration changed
Measured variable status

160• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

283 Memory content inconsistent

1)

Influenced measured
variables

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Apply I/O module configuration(parameter 'Apply I/O configuration')
2. Afterwards reload device description
and check wiring–

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

311 Sensor electronics (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Maintenance required!
Do not reset device

Remedy instructions

Short text

330 Flash file invalid

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

331 Firmware update failed

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Replace user interface board
2. Ex d/XP: replace transmitter• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

332 Writing in HistoROM backup failed

Influenced measured
variables

161

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Restart device
2. Check electronic modules
3. Change I/O module or main electronics• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

361 I/O module 1 to n faulty
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

372 Sensor electronics (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)

Remedy instructions

Short text

373 Sensor electronics (ISEM) faulty

Transfer data or reset device

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status

162

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace module rack inclusive electronic
modules• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

375 I/O- 1 to n communication failed• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

376 Sensor electronics (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

1. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)
2. Turn off diagnostic message

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Activate empty pipe detection
2. Check partial filled pipe and installation
direction
3. Check sensor cabling
4. Deactivate diagnostics 377• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

377 Electrode signal faulty
Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)

1)Diagnostics and troubleshooting

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

378 Supply voltage ISEM faulty
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. If available: Check connection cablebetween sensor and transmitter
2. Replace main electronic module
3. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)

Remedy instructions

Short text

382 Data storage

1. Insert T-DAT
2. Replace T-DAT

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

163

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

383 Memory content

Reset device

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

387 HistoROM data faulty

Contact service organization

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

12.7.3410 Data transfer failed

1. Retry data transfer
2. Check connection

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information

Remedy instructions

Short text

412 Processing download

Download active, please wait

Measured variable status

164

Remedy instructions

Short textNo.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic of configuration

Diagnostic information
No.

Influenced measured
variables

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

431 Trim 1 to n required

Carry out trim–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

437 Configuration incompatible

1. Update firmware
2. Execute factory reset

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check dataset file
2. Check device parameterization
3. Download new device parameterization• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

438 Dataset different
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Short text

441 Current output 1 to n saturated

1. Check current output settings
2. Check process

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser–

165

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

442 Frequency output 1 saturated

1. Check frequency output settings
2. Check process

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

1. Check pulse output settings
2. Check process–

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

444 Current input 1 to n saturated
Measured variable status [from the factory]
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)

1. Check current input settings
2. Check connected device
3. Check process

Influenced measured
variables
Measured values

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

453 Flow override active

Deactivate flow override

Measured variable status

166

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)–

Remedy instructions

443 Pulse output 1 saturated

1)

Influenced measured
variables

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

484 Failure mode simulation active

Deactivate simulation

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

485 Process variable simulation active

Deactivate simulation

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

486 Current input 1 to n simulation active

Deactivate simulation

Measured values

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

491 Current output 1 to n simulation active

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

167

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

492 Frequency output 1 to n simulation active

Deactivate simulation frequency output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

493 Pulse output simulation active

Deactivate simulation pulse output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

494 Switch output 1 to n simulation active

Deactivate simulation switch output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

495 Diagnostic event simulation active

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status

168

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

496 Status input 1 to n simulation active

Deactivate simulation status input–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

511 Sensor setting error
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check measuring period and integration • Conductivity
time• Corrected conductivity
2. Check sensor properties• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

512 ECC recovery time exceeded

1. Check ECC recovery time
2. Turn off ECC

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

520 I/O 1 to n hardware configuration invalid
Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

1. Check I/O hardware configuration
2. Replace wrong I/O module
3. Plug the module of double pulse output
on correct slot–

169

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Remedy instructions

Short text

530 Electrode cleaning active

Switch off electrode cleaning

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

531 Empty pipe adjustment faulty

Execute EPD adjustment

Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)

1)Influenced measured
variables

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

537 Configuration

1. Check IP addresses in network
2. Change IP address

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

–

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

594 Relay output 1 to n simulation active

Deactivate simulation switch output–

Measured variable status

170

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

12.7.4

Diagnostic of process

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

1. Check wiring
2. Change I/O module

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

832 Electronics temperature too highMeasured variable status [from the factory]
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Reduce ambient temperature
1)–

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

833 Electronics temperature too low
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

803 Loop current 1 faulty

1)Diagnostics and troubleshooting

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Increase ambient temperature
1)

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

171

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

834 Process temperature too highReduce process temperature

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning1)

No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

835 Process temperature too low

Increase process temperature

Measured variable status [from the factory]
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning1)

No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

842 Process value below limit
Measured variable status [from the factory]
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning1)• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

1. Decrease process value
2. Check application
3. Check sensor

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

882 Input signal faulty

1. Check input signal parameterization
2. Check external device
3. Check process conditions

Measured variable status

172

Influenced measured
variables

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information

1)• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information

1)

Influenced measured
variables

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status [from the factory]
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1)No.

1. Eliminate external magnetic field nearsensor
2. Turn off diagnostic message• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check if external magnetic interference
is present
2. Perform Heartbeat Verification
3. Check flow value• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

938 Coil current not stable
Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

961 Electrode potential out of specification
Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)

1)Influenced measured
variables

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information1)

Remedy instructions

Short text

937 Sensor symmetry

1)

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Check process conditions
2. Check ambient conditions

Influenced measured
variables• Mass flow
• Status• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

173

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

962 Pipe empty
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Perform full pipe adjustment
2. Perform empty pipe adjustment
3. Turn off empty pipe detection

1)

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values• Density• Electronics temperature• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
option• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

12.8

Pending diagnostic events

The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and theprevious diagnostic event separately.
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  151• Via web browser →  152• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  153• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  153
Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu→  175
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu

 Diagnostics

174

Actual diagnostics→  175

Previous diagnostics→  175

Operating time from restart→  175

Operating time→  175

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Actual diagnostics

Prerequisite
A diagnostic event has occurred.

Description

User interface

Shows the current occured diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

two or more messages occur
 Ifsimultaneously,
the message withthe highest priority is shown on
the display.
Previous diagnostics

Two diagnostic events have alreadyoccurred.

Shows the diagnostic event that
occurred prior to the current diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

Operating time from restart–Shows the time the device has been in
operation since the last device restart.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds(s)Operating time–

Indicates how long the device has beenin operation.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds
(s)

12.9

Diagnostic list

Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list
submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic
events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Diagnostic list
/ ../Diagnose list
Diagnostics
F273 Main electronic
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
A0014006-EN

 27

Taking the example of the local display

To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  151• Via web browser →  152• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  153• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  153

12.10 Event logbook
12.10.1 Reading out the event logbook
A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the
Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics menu → Event logbook submenu → Event list

Endress+Hauser

175

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL/ ../Eventlist
F
I1091 Config. change
I1157 Mem.err. ev.list
0d01h19m10s
F311 Electr. failure
A0014008-EN

 28

Taking the example of the local display• A maximum of 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order.
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device,
the event list can contain up to 100 entries .
The event history includes entries for:• Diagnostic events →  155• Information events →  176
In addition to the operation time of its occurrence, each event is also assigned a symbolthat indicates whether the event has occurred or is ended:• Diagnostic event• : Occurrence of the event• : End of the event• Information event
: Occurrence of the event
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  151• Via web browser →  152• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  153• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  153
For filtering the displayed event messages →  176

12.10.2 Filtering the event logbook
Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message isdisplayed in the Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Event logbook → Filter options
Filter categories• All• Failure (F)• Function check (C)• Out of specification (S)• Maintenance required (M)• Information (I)12.10.3 Overview of information events
Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only andnot in the diagnostic list.
Info number

176

Info name

I1000--------(Device ok)

I1079

Sensor changed

I1089

Power on

I1090

Configuration reset

I1091

Configuration changed

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Info number

Endress+Hauser

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Info name

I1092

HistoROM backup deleted

I1137

Electronics changed

I1151

History reset

I1155

Reset electronics temperature

I1156

Memory error trend

I1157

Memory error event list

I1256

Display: access status changed

I1278

I/O module restarted

I1335

Firmware changed

I1351

Empty pipe detection adjustment failure

I1353

Empty pipe detection adjustment ok

I1361

Web server: login failed

I1397

Fieldbus: access status changed

I1398

CDI: access status changed

I1443

Build-up thickness not determined

I1444

Device verification passed

I1445

Device verification failed

I1457

Measurement error verification failed

I1459

I/O module verification failed

I1461

Sensor verification failed

I1462

Sensor electronic module verific. failed

I1512

Download started

I1513

Download finished

I1514

Upload started

I1515

Upload finishedI1618

I/O module 2 replaced

I1619

I/O module 3 replaced

I1621

I/O module 4 replaced

I1622

Calibration changed

I1624

All totalizers reset

I1625

Write protection activated

I1626

Write protection deactivatedI1627

Web server: login successful

I1628

Display: login successful

I1629

CDI: login successful

I1631

Web server access changed

I1632

Display: login failed

I1633

CDI: login failed

I1634

Reset to factory settings

I1635

Reset to delivery settings

I1639

Max. switch cycles number reached

I1649

Hardware write protection activated

I1650

Hardware write protection deactivated177

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Info number

Info name

I1712

New flash file received

I1725

Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed

I1726

Configuration backup failed

12.11 Resetting the measuring device
The entire device configuration or some of the configuration can be reset to a defined statewith the Device reset parameter (→  130).

12.11.1 Function scope of "Device reset" parameter
Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

To delivery settings

Every parameter for which a customer-specific default setting was ordered is resetto the customer-specific value. All other parameters are reset to the factory setting.

Restart device

The restart resets every parameter with data stored in volatile memory (RAM) to
the factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains
unchanged.

12.12 Device information
The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different
information for device identification.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Device information‣ Device information

178

Device tag→  179

Serial number→  179

Firmware version→  179

Device name→  179

Manufacturer→  179

Order code→  179

Extended order code 1→  179

Extended order code 2→  179

Extended order code 3→  179

ENP version→  179

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Factory setting

Device tag

Shows name of measuring point.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters

PromagSerial number

Shows the serial number of the measuring
device.

Max. 11-digit character string
comprising letters andnumbers.

–

Firmware version

Shows the device firmware version installed.

Character string in the format
xx.yy.zz–

Device nameShows the name of the transmitter.

Promag 300/500–

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters

Prowirl

The name can be found on the
nameplate of the transmitter.

Device name

Manufacturer

Displays the manufacturer.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters

Endress+Hauser

Order code

Shows the device order code.

Character string composed ofletters, numbers and certain
punctuation marks (e.g. /).

–Character string–

Character string–

Character string–

Character string

2.02.00

order code can be found on the The
nameplate of the sensor andtransmitter in the "Order code" field.
Extended order code 1

Shows the 1st part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 2

Shows the 2nd part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 3

Shows the 3rd part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

ENP version

Endress+Hauser

Shows the version of the electronic
nameplate (ENP).

179

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

12.13 Firmware history
Releasedate

Firmwareversion

Order codefor"Firmwareversion"Firmwarechanges

2023

01.00.zz

Option 61

Original firmware

Documentation
type

OperatingInstructions

Documentation

BA02105D/06/EN/01.21

It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version using the service interface.
For the compatibility of the firmware version with the installed device description files
and operating tools, observe the information about the device in the "Manufacturer's
information" document.
The manufacturer's information is available:• In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com →Downloads• Specify the following details:• Product root: e.g. 5P3B
The product root is the first part of the order code: see the nameplate on thedevice.
• Text search: Manufacturer's information• Media type: Documentation – Technical Documentation

180

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

13

Maintenance

13.1

Maintenance tasks

MaintenanceNo special maintenance work is required.

13.1.1

Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do notattack the surface of the housing or the seals.

13.1.2

Interior cleaning

No interior cleaning is planned for the device.

13.2

Measuring and test equipment

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of measuring and test equipment, such as W@M or
device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: →  184→  186

13.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration,
maintenance service or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

Endress+Hauser

181

Repair

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

14

Repair

14.1

General information

14.1.1

Repair and conversion concept

The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following:• The measuring devices have a modular design.
• Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions.
• Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers.
• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser
Service or at the factory.

14.1.2

Notes for repair and conversion

For repair and modification of a measuring device, observe the following notes:‣ Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts.
‣ Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions.
‣ Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA)
and certificates.

‣ Document every repair and each conversion and enter them into the W@M life cycle
management database and Netilion Analytics.

14.2

Spare parts

Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer):
All the spare parts for the measuring device, along with the order code, are listed here andcan be ordered. If available, users can also download the associated Installation
Instructions.
Measuring device serial number:• Is located on the nameplate of the device.
• Can be read out via the Serial number parameter (→  179) in the Device
information submenu.

14.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

14.4

ReturnThe requirements for safe device return can vary depending on the device type andnational legislation.

182

1.

Refer to the web page for information:
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material
 Select the region.

2.

Return the device if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the wrong
device was ordered or delivered.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

14.5

Repair

Disposal

If required by the Directive 2012/19/EU on waste electrical and electronic equipment(WEEE), the product is marked with the depicted symbol in order to minimize thedisposal of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste. Do not dispose of products bearing thismarking as unsorted municipal waste. Instead, return them to the manufacturer for
disposal under the applicable conditions.

14.5.1
1.

Removing the measuring device

Switch off the device.

LWARNING
Danger to persons from process conditions!
‣ Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, hightemperatures or aggressive media.
2.

Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe thesafety instructions.

14.5.2

Disposing of the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health.
‣ Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that arehazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into
crevices or diffused through plastic.
Observe the following notes during disposal:‣ Observe valid federal/national regulations.
‣ Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.

Endress+Hauser

183

Accessories

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

15

Accessories

Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress+Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question isavailable from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of theEndress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.

15.1

Device-specific accessories

15.1.1For the transmitter

Accessories

Description

Proline 300 transmitter

Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following
specifications:• Approvals• Output• Input• Display/operation• Housing• Software Order code: 5X3BXX
 Installation Instructions EA01199D
Remote display andoperating module
DKX001• If ordered directly with the measuring device:
Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Remote display 4-line, illuminated;
10 m (30 ft) cable; touch control"• If ordered separately:• Measuring device: order code for "Display; operation", option M "W/o, preparedfor remote display"• DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001• If ordered subsequently:
DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001
Mounting bracket for DKX001• If ordered directly: order code for "Accessory enclosed", option RA "Mounting
bracket, pipe 1/2""• If ordered subsequently: order number: 71340960
Connecting cable (replacement cable)
Via the separate product structure: DKX002

 Further information on display and operating module DKX001→  209.
 Special Documentation SD01763D
External WLAN antenna

External WLAN antenna with 1.5 m (59.1 in) connecting cable and two angle
brackets. Order code for "Accessory enclosed", option P8 "Wireless antenna widearea".
The external WLAN antenna is not suitable for use in hygienic • applications.
• Additional information regarding the WLAN interface →  75.

 Order number: 71351317
 Installation Instructions EA01238D
Weather protection cover

Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g.
rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight.

 Order number: 71343505
 Installation Instructions EA01160D
Ground cable

184

Set, consisting of two ground cables for potential equalization.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

15.1.2

Accessories

For the sensor

Accessories

Description

Ground disks

Are used to ground the medium in lined measuring tubes to ensure proper
measurement.

 For details, see Installation Instructions EA00070D
15.2

Communication-specific accessories

Accessories

Description

Fieldgate FXA42

Is used to transmit the measured values of connected 4 to 20 mA analog
measuring devices, as well as digital measuring devices
Technical Information TI01297S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01778S• Product page: www.endress.com/fxa42

Field Xpert SMT50

The Field Xpert SMT70 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in non-hazardous areas. It is suitable for commissioning andmaintenance staff to manage field instruments with a digital communicationinterface and to record progress.
This tablet PC is designed as an all-in-one solution with a preinstalled driver libraryand is an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive tool which can be used to manage field
instruments throughout their entire life cycle.
Technical Information TI01342S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01709S• Product page: www.endress.com/smt50

Field Xpert SMT70

The Field Xpert SMT70 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in hazardous and non-hazardous areas. It is suitable forcommissioning and maintenance staff to manage field instruments with a digitalcommunication interface and to record progress.
This tablet PC is designed as an all-in-one solution with a preinstalled driver libraryand is an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive tool which can be used to manage field
instruments throughout their entire life cycle.
Technical Information TI01342S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01709S• Product page: www.endress.com/smt70

Field Xpert SMT77

The Field Xpert SMT77 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in areas categorized as Ex Zone 1.
Technical Information TI01418S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01923S• Product page: www.endress.com/smt77

Endress+Hauser

185

Accessories

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

15.3

Service-specific accessories

Accessory

Description

Applicator

Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices:• Choice of measuring devices with industrial requirements• Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter:
e.g. nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy.
• Graphic illustration of the calculation results• Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation andaccess to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle ofa project.
Applicator is available:• Via the Internet: https://portal.endress.com/webapp/applicator• As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation.

W@M

W@M Life Cycle Management
Improved productivity with information at your fingertips. Data relevant to aplant and its components is generated from the first stages of planning andduring the asset’s complete life cycle.
W@M Life Cycle Management is an open and flexible information platform
with online and on-site tools. Instant access for your staff to current, in-depth
data shortens your plant’s engineering time, speeds up procurement processes
and increases plant uptime.
Combined with the right services, W@M Life Cycle Management boosts
productivity in every phase. For more information, see:www.endress.com/lifecyclemanagement

FieldCare

FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.
It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage
them. By using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way ofchecking their status and condition.

 Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S
DeviceCare

Tool for connecting and configuring Endress+Hauser field devices.

 Innovation brochure IN01047S
15.4

System components

Accessories

Description

Memograph M graphic
data manager

The Memograph M graphic data manager provides information on all the relevantmeasured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values aremonitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB
internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick.
Information TI00133R
 •• Technical
Operating Instructions BA00247R

iTEMP

The temperature transmitters can be used in all applications and are suitable forthe measurement of gases, steam and liquids. They can be used to read in themedium temperature.

 "Fields of Activity" document FA00006T

186

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

16

Technical data

16.1

Application

The measuring device is intended only for the flow measurement of liquids with aminimum conductivity of 5 µS/cm.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use themeasuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.

16.2

Function and system design

Measuring principle

Electromagnetic flow measurement on the basis of Faraday's law of magnetic induction.

Measuring system

The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
Information on the structure of the device →  13

16.3
Measured variable

Input

Direct measured variables• Volume flow (proportional to induced voltage)• Electrical conductivity
Calculated measured variables• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Measuring range

Typically v = 0.01 to 10 m/s (0.03 to 33 ft/s) with the specified accuracy
Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 15 to 125 (½ to 4")
Nominal diameter

Endress+Hauser

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. fullscale value(v ~0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value
current output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value(~ 2 pulse/s)

Low flow cut off(v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[dm3/min][dm3/min][dm3][dm3/min]15½

4 to 100

25

0.2

0.5

25

1

9 to 300

75

0.5

1

32

–

15 to 500

125

1

2

40

1½

25 to 700

200

1.5

3

50

2

35 to 1 100

300

2.5

5

187

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Recommendedflow

Nominal diameter

Factory settingsmin./max. fullscale value(v ~0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value
current output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value(~ 2 pulse/s)

Low flow cut off(v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[dm3/min][dm3/min][dm3][dm3/min]65–

60 to 2 000

500

5

8

80

3

90 to 3 000

750

5

12

100

4

145 to 4 700

1200

10

20

125

–

220 to 7 500

1850

15

30

Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 150 to 600 (6 to 24")
Nominal diameter

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. fullscale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value
current output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value(~ 2 pulse/s)

Low flow cut off(v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[m3/h][m3/h][m3][m3/h]

150

6

20 to 600

150

0.03

2.5

200

8

35 to 1 100

300

0.05

5

250

10

55 to 1 700

500

0.05

7.5

300

12

80 to 2 400

750

0.1

10

350

14

110 to 3 300

1 000

0.1

15

400

16

140 to 4 200

1 200

0.15

20

450

18

180 to 5 400

1 500

0.25

25

500

20

220 to 6 600

2 000

0.25

30

600

24

310 to 9 600

2 500

0.3

40

Flow characteristic values in US units: ½ - 24" (DN 15 - 600)
Nominal diameter

188

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. fullscale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value
current output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value(~ 2 pulse/s)

Low flow cut off(v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[in]

[mm]

[gal/min][gal/min][gal][gal/min]½

15

1.0 to 27

6

0.1

0.15

1

25

2.5 to 80

18

0.2

0.25

1½

40

7 to 190

50

0.5

0.75

2

50

10 to 300

75

0.5

1.25

3

80

24 to 800

200

2

2.5

4

100

40 to 1 250

300

2

4

6

150

90 to 2 650

600

5

12

8

200

155 to 4 850

1200

10

15

10

250

250 to 7 500

1500

15

30

12

300

350 to 10 600

2400

25

45

14

350

500 to 15 000

3600

30

60

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

Recommendedflow

Nominal diameter

Factory settingsmin./max. fullscale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value
current output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value(~ 2 pulse/s)

Low flow cut off(v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[in]

[mm]

[gal/min][gal/min][gal][gal/min]16

400

600 to 19 000

4800

50

60

18

450

800 to 24 000

6000

50

90

20

500

1 000 to 30 000

7500

75

120

24

600

1 400 to 44 000

10500

100

180

Recommended measuring range
Flow limit →  204

Operable flow range

Over 1000 : 1

Input signal

External measured values
To increase the accuracy of certain measured variables or to calculate the mass flow, theautomation system can continuously write different measured values to the measuring
device:• Medium temperature enables temperature-compensated conductivity measurement (e.g.
iTEMP)• Reference density for calculating the mass flow
Various pressure and temperature measuring devices can be ordered from Endress+Hauser: see "Accessories" section →  186
It is recommended to read in external measured values to calculate the corrected volume
flow.
Current input
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the current input →  189.
Digital communication
The measured values are written by the automation system via PROFINET with EthernetAPL.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA

Endress+Hauser

Current input

0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive)

Current span

• 4 to 20 mA (active)• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)

Resolution

1 µA

Voltage drop

Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive)

Maximum input voltage≤ 30 V (passive)

Open-circuit voltage≤ 28.8 V (active)

Possible input variables• Temperature• Density

189Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Status input

190

Maximum input values• DC –3 to 30 V
• If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 kΩ

Response time

Configurable: 5 to 200 ms

Input signal level• Low signal: DC –3 to +5 V
• High signal: DC 12 to 30 V

Assignable functions• Off• Reset the individual totalizers separately• Reset all totalizers• Flow override

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

16.4
Output signal

Technical data

OutputPROFINET with Ethernet-APL
Device use

Device connection to an APL field switch
The device may only be operated according to the following APL port
classifications:• If used in hazardous areas: SLAA or SLAC 1)• If used in non-hazardous areas: SLAX
Connection values of APL field switch (for example corresponds to APL port
classification SPCC or SPAA, for instance):• Maximum input voltage: 15 VDC• Minimum output values: 0.54 W
Device connection to an SPE switch• In non-hazardous areas, the device can be used with a suitable SPE switch: The
device can be connected to an SPE switch with a maximum voltage of 30 VDC
and a minimum output power of 1.85 W.
• The SPE switch must support the 10BASE-T1L standard and the PoDL powerclasses 10, 11 or 12 and have a function to disable power class recognition.

PROFINET

According to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784

Ethernet-APL

According to IEEE 802.3cg, APL port profile specification v1.0, galvanicallyisolated

Data transfer

10 Mbit/s

Current consumption

Transmitter• Max. 400 mA(24 V)• Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz)

Permitted supply voltage

9 to 30 V

Network connection

With integrated reverse polarity protection

1)

For more information on using the device in the hazardous area, see the Ex-specific Safety Instructions

Current output 4 to 20 mA

Endress+Hauser

Signal mode

Can be set to:• Active• Passive

Current span

Can be set to:• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR• 4 to 20 mA US• 4 to 20 mA• 0 to 20 mA (only if the signal mode is active)• Fixed current

Maximum output values

22.5 mA

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage

DC 30 V (passive)

Load

0 to 700 Ω

Resolution

0.38 µA

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Electronics temperature

191

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Pulse/frequency/switch output
FunctionCan be configured as pulse, frequency or switch output

VersionOpen collector
Can be set to:• Active• Passive• Passive NAMUR Ex-i, passive
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Voltage drop

For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V

Pulse output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Pulse width

Configurable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms

Maximum pulse rate

10 000 Impulse/s

Pulse value

Configurable

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Frequency output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Output frequency

Configurable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz(f max = 12 500 Hz)

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s

Pulse/pause ratio

1:1

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Electronics temperature

Switch output

192

Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Switching behavior

Binary, conductive or non-conductive

Switching delay

Configurable: 0 to 100 s

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

Number of switchingcyclesUnlimited

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value:• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Totalizer 1-3• Electronics temperature• Flow direction monitoring• Status• Empty pipe detection• Buildup index• HBSI limit value exceeded• Low flow cut off

Relay output
Function

Switch output

Version

Relay output, galvanically isolated

Switching behavior

Can be set to:• NO (normally open), factory setting• NC (normally closed)

Maximum switchingcapacity (passive)• DC 30 V, 0.1 A• AC 30 V, 0.5 A

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value:• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Totalizer 1-3• Electronics temperature• Flow direction monitoring• Status• Empty pipe detection• Buildup index• HBSI limit value exceeded• Low flow cut off

User-configurable input/output
One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurableI/O) during device commissioning.
The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment:• Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Pulse/frequency/switch output• Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Status input
Signal on alarm

Endress+Hauser

Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows:193

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

PROFINET with Ethernet-APL
Device diagnostics

Diagnostics according to PROFINET PA Profile 4

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Failure mode

Choose from:• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US• Min. value: 3.59 mA• Max. value: 22.5 mA• Definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA• Actual value• Last valid value

0 to 20 mA
Failure mode

Choose from:• Maximum alarm: 22 mA• Definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA

Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Actual value• No pulses

Frequency output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Actual value• 0 Hz• Definable value between: 2 to 12 500 Hz

Switch output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Relay output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Local display
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Backlight

Red lighting indicates a device error.

Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107

194

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

Interface/protocol• Via digital communication:
PROFINET with Ethernet-APL• Via service interface• CDI-RJ45 service interface• WLAN interface
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Web browser
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Light emitting diodes (LED)
Status information

Status indicated by various light emitting diodes
The following information is displayed depending on the device version:• Supply voltage active• Data transmission active• Device alarm/error has occurred• PROFINET network available• PROFINET connection established• PROFINET blinking feature Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes →  147
Low flow cut off

The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable.

Galvanic isolation

The outputs are galvanically isolated:• from the power supply• from one another• from the potential equalization (PE) terminal

protocol-specific data

ProtocolApplication layer protocol for decentral device periphery and distributed
automation, Version 2.43

Communication type

Ethernet Advanced Physical Layer 10BASE-T1L

Conformance Class

Conformance Class B (PA)

Netload ClassPROFINET Netload Robustness Class 2 10 Mbit/s

Baud rates

10 Mbit/s Full-duplex

Cycle times

64 ms

Polarity

Automatic correction of crossed "APL signal +" and "APL signal -" signal lines

Media Redundancy Protocol(MRP)

Not possible (point-to-point connection to APL field switch)

System redundancy support

System redundancy S2 (2 AR with 1 NAP)

Device profile

PROFINET PA profile 4 (Application interface identifier API: 0x9700)

Manufacturer ID

17

Device type ID

0xA43C

Device description files (GSD,
DTM, FDI)

Information and files at:• www.endress.com → Download Area
• www.profibus.com

Endress+Hauser

195

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Supported connections• 2x AR (IO Controller AR)• 2x AR (IO Supervisor Device AR connection allowed)

Configuration options formeasuring device• DIP switches on the electronics module, for device name assignment (lastpart)• Asset management software (FieldCare, DeviceCare, Field Xpert)• Integrated Web server via Web browser and IP address• Device master file (GSD), can be read out via the integrated Web server ofthe measuring device.
• Onsite operation

Configuration of thedevice name

• DIP switches on the electronics module, for device name assignment (lastpart)• DCP protocol• Asset management software (FieldCare, DeviceCare, Field Xpert)• Integrated Web server

Supported functions• Identification & Maintenance, simple device identifier via:
• Control system• Nameplate• Measured value status
The process variables are communicated with a measured value status• Blinking feature via the local display for simple device identification andassignment• Device operation via asset management software (e.g. FieldCare,
DeviceCare, SIMATIC PDM with FDI package)

System integration

Information regarding system integration .
• Cyclic data transmission• Overview and description of the modules• Status coding• Factory setting

16.5

Power supply

Terminal assignment→  37Available device plugs→  37

Pin assignment, device plug→  37

Supply voltage

Order code for"Power supply"

Terminal voltage

Option D

DC 24 V

Option E

AC 100 to 240 V –15 to +10%

50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz

DC 24 V–

Option I

Power consumption

Frequency range
±20%

±20%

AC 100 to 240 V –15 to +10%–

50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz

TransmitterMax. 10 W (active power)switch-on current

196

Max. 36 A (<5 ms) as per NAMUR Recommendation NE 21

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Current consumption

Technical data

Transmitter• Max. 400 mA (24 V)• Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz)

Power supply failure• Totalizers stop at the last value measured.
• Depending on the device version, the configuration is retained in the device memory orin the plug-in memory (HistoROM DAT).
• Error messages (incl. total operated hours) are stored.

Overcurrent protection
element

The device must be operated with a dedicated circuit breaker, as it does not have an
ON/OFF switch of its own.
• The circuit breaker must be easy to reach and labeled accordingly.
• Permitted nominal current of the circuit breaker: 2 A up to maximum 10 A.

Electrical connection→  38Potential equalization→  41

Terminals

Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).

Cable entries• Cable gland: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Thread for cable entry:• NPT ½"
• G ½"• M20

Cable specification→  34

Overvoltage protection

Mains voltage fluctuations→  196

Overvoltage category

Overvoltage category II

Short-term, temporary overvoltage

Up to 1200 V between cable and ground, for max. 5 s

Long-term, temporary overvoltage

Up to 500 V between cable and ground

16.6

Performance characteristics

Reference operating
conditions• Error limits following DIN EN 29104, in future ISO 20456• Water, typically: +15 to +45 °C (+59 to +113 °F); 0.5 to 7 bar (73 to 101 psi)
• Data as indicated in the calibration protocol• Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs according to ISO 17025

Maximum measured erroro.r. = of reading

Endress+Hauser

197

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Error limits under reference operating conditions
Volume flow
• ±0.5 % o.r. ± 1 mm/s (0.04 in/s)• Optional: ±0.2 % o.r. ± 2 mm/s (0.08 in/s)
Fluctuations in the supply voltage do not have any effect within the specified range.

[%]
2.5
2.0

0.5 %

1.5

0.2 %

1.0
0.5
0
0

1

0

2

5

4

10

6

15

20

8

25

30

10 [m/s]v
32 [ft/s]
A0028974 29

Maximum measured error in % o.r.

Flat SpecIn the case of Flat Spec, the measured error is constant in the range from v0.5 (v0.2) to vmax.
[%]
2.5
2.0

0.5 %

1.5

0.2 %

1.0
0.5
0
0
0

v0.2

v0.5

[m/s]
v
[ft/s]

vmax

A0017051

 30

Flat Spec in % o.r.

Flat Spec flow values 0.5 %Nominal diameter

198

v0.5

vmax

[mm]

[in]

[m/s]

[ft/s][m/s][ft/s]

25 to 600

1 to 24

0.5

1.64

10

32

50 to 300

2 to 12

0.25

0.82

5

16

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

Flat Spec flow values 0.2 %Nominal diameter

v0.2

vmax

[mm]

[in]

[m/s]

[ft/s][m/s][ft/s]

25 to 600

1 to 24

1.5

4.92

10

32

50 to 300

2 to 12

0.6

1.97

4

13

Electrical conductivity
The values apply for:• Devices installed in a metal pipe or in a non-metal pipe with ground disks• Devices whose potential equalization was performed according to the instructions in theassociated Operating Instructions• Measurements at a reference temperature of 25 °C (77 °F). At different temperatures,
attention must be paid to the temperature coefficient of the medium (typically 2.1 %/K)
Conductivity [µS/cm]

Measured error [%] of reading

5 to 20± 20%> 20 to 50± 10%> 50 to 10 000• Standard: ± 10%• Optional 1): ± 5%

> 10 000 to 20 000± 10%> 20 000 to 100 000

± 20%

1)

Order code for "Calibrated conductivity measurement", option CW

[%]
+30
+20
+10
0
–10
–20
–30
10⁰

10¹

10²

10³

10⁴

10⁵

10⁶ [µS/cm]
A0042279

 31

Measured error (standard)

[%]
+30
+20
+10
0
–10
–20
–30
10⁰

10¹

10²

10³

10⁴

10⁵

10⁶ [µS/cm]
A0047944

 32

Endress+Hauser

Measured error (optional: order code for "Calibrated conductivity measurement", option CW)

199

Technical data

Repeatability

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

o.r. = of reading
Volume flow
Max. ±0.1 % o.r. ± 0.5 mm/s (0.02 in/s)
Electrical conductivity• Max. ±5 % o.r.
• With order code for "Calibrated conductivity measurement", option CW: ±2 % v.M.

Influence of ambient
temperature

Current output
Temperature coefficientMax. 1 μA/°C

Pulse/frequency output
Temperature coefficient

16.7
Mounting requirements

Mounting→  19

16.8
Ambient temperature
range

No additional effect. Included in accuracy.

Environment→  24Temperature tables
Observe the interdependencies between the permitted ambient and fluid
temperatures when operating the device in hazardous areas.
For detailed information on the temperature tables, see the separate document
entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.

Storage temperature

The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of thetransmitter and the sensor →  24.
• Protect the measuring device against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid
unacceptably high surface temperatures.
• Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus or bacteria infestation can damage the liner.
• If protection caps or protective covers are mounted these should never be removed
before installing the measuring device.

Relative humidity

The device is suitable for use in outdoor and indoor areas with a relative humidity of
4 to 95%.

Operating height

According to EN 61010-1• ≤ 2 000 m (6 562 ft)• > 2 000 m (6 562 ft) with additional overvoltage protection (e.g. Endress+Hauser HAWSeries)200

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Degree of protection

Technical data

Transmitter• IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 4• When the housing is open: IP20, Type 1 enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 2• Display module: IP20, Type 1 enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 2
Optional
Order code for "Sensor option", option C3• IP66/67, type 4X enclosure• Fully welded, with protective coating as per EN ISO 12944 C5-M
• For the operation of the device in corrosive environments
External WLAN antenna
IP67

Vibration- and shockresistance

Sinusoidal vibration according to IEC 60068-2-6• 2 to 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm peak
• 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 1 g peak
Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-64• 10 to 200 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz• 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.001 g2/Hz• Total: 1.54 g rms
Shock half-sine, according to IEC 60068-2-27
6 ms 30 g
Rough handling shocks according to IEC 60068-2-31

Mechanical load

Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)

Transmitter housing:• Protect against mechanical effects, such as shock or impact• Do not use as a ladder or climbing aid
Details are provided in the Declaration of Conformity.
This unit is not intended for use in residential environments and cannot guarantee
adequate protection of the radio reception in such environments.

16.9
Medium temperature range

Endress+Hauser

Process• –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")• –20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA high-temperature, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")• –40 to +130 °C (–40 to +266 °F) for PTFE, DN 15 to 600 (½ to 24")201

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

1

TA[°F] [°C]
140 60
100

2

3

4

40
20
0

0

-20

-40

-40
-40 -20 0-40

020 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
TF
100
200
300 360 [°F]A0035803

 33
TA
TF
1
2
3
4

PFA

Ambient temperature
Medium temperature
Colored area: the ambient temperature range –10 to –20 °C (+14 to –4 °F) applies to stainless flanges only
Hatched area: harsh environment only for medium temperature range –20 to +130 °C (–4 to +266 °F)–20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")–20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA high-temperature, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")1TA[°F] [°C]
140 60
100

40
20
0

0

-20

-40

-40
-40 -20 0-40

020 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
TF
100
200
300 360 [°F]A0029808

 34
TA
TF
1

Conductivity
Pressure-temperature
ratings
202

PTFE

Ambient temperature
Medium temperature
Colored area: the ambient temperature range of –10 to –40 °C (+14 to –40 °F) applies to stainless flanges
only≥5 μS/cm for liquids in general.
For an overview of the pressure-temperature ratings for the process connections, see
the Technical Information
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Pressure tightness

Technical data

Liner: PFA
Nominal diameter

Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:

[mm]

[in]

+25 °C (+77 °F)+80 °C (+176 °F)+100 to +180 °C(+212 to +356 °F)

25

1

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

32

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

40

1½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

50

2

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

65

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

80

3

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100

4

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

125

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

150

6

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

200

8

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

Liner: PTFE

Endress+Hauser

Nominal diameter

Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:

[mm]

[in]

+25 °C (+77 °F)+80 °C (+176 °F)+100 °C (+212 °F)+130 °C (+266 °F)

15

½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

25

1

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

32

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

40

1½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

50

2

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

65

–

0 (0)

–

40 (0.58)

130 (1.89)

80

3

0 (0)

–

40 (0.58)

130 (1.89)

100

4

0 (0)

–

135 (1.96)

170 (2.47)

125–

135 (1.96)–

240 (3.48)

385 (5.58)150

6135 (1.96)–

240 (3.48)

385 (5.58)200

8200 (2.90)–

290 (4.21)

410 (5.95)

250

10

330 (4.79)–

400 (5.80)

530 (7.69)

300

12

400 (5.80)–

500 (7.25)

630 (9.14)

350

14

470 (6.82)–

600 (8.70)

730 (10.6)

400

16

540 (7.83)–

670 (9.72)

800 (11.6)

450

18

500

20

600

24

No negative pressure permitted!

203

Technical data

Flow limit

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor.
The optimum velocity of flow is between 2 to 3 m/s (6.56 to 9.84 ft/s). Also match thevelocity of flow (v) to the physical properties of the medium:• v < 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for abrasive media (e.g. potter's clay, lime milk, ore slurry)• v > 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for media producing buildup (e.g. wastewater sludge)
A necessary increase in the flow velocity can be achieved by reducing the sensor
nominal diameter.
For an overview of the full scale values for the measuring range, see the "Measuring
range" section

Pressure loss

• No pressure loss occurs if the sensor is installed in a pipe with the same nominal
diameter.
• Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters according to DIN EN 545→  25

System pressure→  25Vibrations→  2516.10 Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions

Weight

For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section .
All values (weight exclusive of packaging material) refer to devices with flanges of thestandard pressure rating.
The weight may be lower than indicated depending on the pressure rating and design.
Weight specifications including transmitter as per order code for "Housing", option A"Aluminum, coated".
Different values due to different transmitter versions:
Transmitter version for the hazardous area
(Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"; Ex d): +2 kg (+4.4 lbs)
Weight in SI units
Nominal diameter

204

EN (DIN), AS 1)

ASME

JIS

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating

[kg]

15

½

PN 40

7.2

Class 150

7.2

10K

4.5

25

1

PN 40

8.0

Class 150

8.0

10K

5.3

32

–

PN 40

8.7

Class 150

–

10K

5.3

40

1½

PN 40

10.1

Class 150

10.1

10K

6.3

50

2

PN 40

11.3

Class 150

11.3

10K

7.3

65

–

PN 16

12.7

Class 150

–

10K

9.1

80

3

PN 16

14.7

Class 150

14.7

10K

10.5

100

4

PN 16

16.7

Class 150

16.7

10K

12.7

125

–

PN 16

22.2

Class 150

–

10K

19

150

6

PN 16

26.2

Class 150

26.2

10K

22.5

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

EN (DIN), AS 1)

Nominal diameter

ASME

JIS

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating

[kg]

200

8

PN 10

45.7

Class 150

45.7

10K

39.9

250

10

PN 10

65.7

Class 150

75.7

10K

67.4

300

12

PN 10

70.7

Class 150

111

10K

70.3

350

14

PN 10

105.7

Class 150

176

10K

79

400

16

PN 10

120.7

Class 150

206

10K

100

450

18

PN 10

161.7

Class 150

256

10K

128

500

20

PN 10

156.7

Class 150

286

10K

142

600

24

PN 10

208.7

Class 150

406

10K

188

1)

For flanges according to AS, only DN 25 and 50 are available.

Weight in US units
Nominal diameter

Measuring tube
specification

Endress+Hauser

ASME

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating

[lbs]

15

½

Class 150

15.9

25

1

Class 150

17.6

40

1½

Class 150

22.3

50

2

Class 150

24.9

80

3

Class 150

32.4

100

4

Class 150

36.8

150

6

Class 150

57.7

200

8

Class 150

101

250

10

Class 150

167

300

12

Class 150

244

350

14

Class 150

387

400

16

Class 150

454

450

18

Class 150

564

500

20

Class 150

630

600

24

Class 150

895

NominaldiameterPressure rating
EN
(DIN)

ASME

Process connection internal diameter

AS 2129 AS 4087

JIS

PFA

PTFE

[mm]

[in]

[bar]

[psi]

[bar]

[bar]

[bar]

[mm]

[in]

[mm]

[in]

15

½

PN 40

Class 150

–

–

20K

–

–

15

0.59

25

1

PN 40

Class 150

Table E

–

20K

23

0.91

26

1.02

32

–

PN 40

–

–

–

20K

32

1.26

35

1.38

40

1½

PN 40

Class 150

–

–

20K

36

1.42

41

1.61

50

2

PN 40

Class 150

Table E

PN 16

10K

48

1.89

52

2.05

65

–

PN 16

–

–

–

10K

63

2.48

67

2.64

80

3

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

75

2.95

80

3.15

205

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

NominaldiameterMaterials

Pressure rating
EN
(DIN)

ASME

Process connection internal diameter

AS 2129 AS 4087

JIS

PFA

PTFE

[mm]

[in]

[bar]

[psi]

[bar]

[bar]

[bar]

[mm]

[in]

[mm]

[in]

100

4

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

101

3.98

104

4.09

125

–

PN 16

–

–

–

10K

126

4.96

129

5.08

150

6

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

154

6.06

156

6.14

200

8

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

201

7.91

202

7.95

250

10

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

256

10.1

300

12

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

306

12.0

350

14

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

337

13.3

400

16

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

387

15.2

450

18

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

432

17.0

500

20

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

487

19.2

600

24

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

593

23.3

Transmitter housing
Order code for "Housing":
Option A "Aluminum, coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated
Window material
Order code for "Housing":
Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass
Cable entries/cable glands
Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"
The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
Cable entry/cable glandCompression fitting M20 × 1.5
Adapter for cable entry with female thread G ½"

Material
Non-Ex: plastic
Z2, D2, Ex d/de: brass with plastic
Nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with female thread NPT ½"

Sensor housing• DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12")
Aluminum half-shell housing, aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated• DN 25 to 600 (1 to 24")
Fully welded carbon steel housing with protective varnish
Measuring tubes
Stainless steel, 1.4301/304/1.4306/304L
For flanges made of carbon with Al/Zn protective coating (DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12")) or
protective varnish (DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24"))

206

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

Liner
• PFA
• PTFE
Process connections
EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
Stainless steel, 1.4571; carbon steel, E250C 1)/S235JRG2/P245GH
ASME B16.5
Stainless steel, F316L; carbon steel, A105 1)
JIS B2220
Stainless steel, F316L; carbon steel, A105/A350 LF2 1)
AS 2129 Table E• DN 25 (1"): carbon steel, A105/S235JRG2• DN 40 (1 ½"): carbon steel, A105/S275JR
AS 4087 PN 16
Carbon steel, A105/S275JRElectrodes
Stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); platinum; tantalum;
titaniumSeals
As per DIN EN 1514-1, form IBC
Accessories
Protective cover
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)
External WLAN antenna• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylonitrile styrene acrylate) and nickel-plated brass• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass• Cable: Polyethylene• Plug: Nickel-plated brass• Angle bracket: Stainless steel
Ground disks• Stainless steel, 1.4435 (316L)• Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022)• Titanium• Tantalum
Fitted electrodes

Measuring electrode, reference electrode and empty pipe detection electrode:• 1.4435 (316L)• Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022)• Tantalum• Titanium• Platinum
Optional: only platinum or tantalum measuring electrode1)

DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12") with Al/Zn protective varnish; DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24") with protective varnish

Endress+Hauser

207

Technical data

Process connections

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)• ASME B16.5• JIS B2220• AS 2129 Table E• AS 4087 PN 16
For information on the different materials used in the process connections →  207

Surface roughness

Stainless steel electrodes, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); platinum;
tantalum; titanium:≤ 0.3 to 0.5 µm (11.8 to 19.7 µin)
(All data refer to parts in contact with the medium)
Liner with PFA:
≤ 0.4 µm (15.7 µin)
(All data refer to parts in contact with the medium)16.11 Operability
Languages

Can be operated in the following languages:• Via local operation
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish• Via Web browser
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish• Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, Japanese

Local operation

Via display module
Equipment:• Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control"• Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control + WLAN"
Information about WLAN interface →  75

A0026785

 35

Operation with touch control

Display elements• 4-line, illuminated, graphic display• White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors• Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individuallyconfigured

208

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

Operating elements• External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: ,, • Operating elements also accessible in the various zones of the hazardous area
Via remote display and operating module DKX001
The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra→  184.
• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any onetime.

A0026786

 36

Operation via remote display and operating module DKX001

Display and operating elements
The display and operating elements correspond to those of the display module →  208.
Housing material
The housing material of the display and operating module DKX001 depends on the choiceof transmitter housing material.
Transmitter housing

Remote display and operating module

Order code for "Housing"Material

Material

Option A "Aluminum, coated"

AlSi10Mg, coated

AlSi10Mg, coated

Cable entry
Corresponds to the choice of transmitter housing, order code for "Electrical connection".
Connecting cable→  35
Dimensions
Information about dimensions:"Mechanical construction" section of the "Technical Information" document.
Remote operation

Endress+Hauser→  74209

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Service interface→  75

Supported operating tools

Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device.
Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units andvia a variety of interfaces.
Supported operating
tools

Operating unit

Interface

Additional information

Web browser

Notebook, PC or tablet
with Web browser• CDI-RJ45 service
interface• WLAN interface

Special Documentation for thedeviceDeviceCare SFE100

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  186

FieldCare SFE500

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  186

Field Xpert

SMT70/77/50• All fieldbus protocols• WLAN interface• Bluetooth• CDI-RJ45 service
interface

Operating Instructions
BA01202S

WLAN→  186

SmartBlue app

Smart phone or tablet
with iOs or Android

Device description files:
Use update function ofhandheld terminal

Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/
iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available
from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools,
among others, is supported:• Field Device Manager (FDM) from Honeywell → www.process.honeywell.com• FieldMate from Yokogawa → www.yokogawa.com• PACTWare → www.pactware.com
The related device description files are available: www.endress.com → Download Area
Web serverWith the integrated web server, the device can be operated and configured via a web
browser via Ethernet-APL, the the service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via the WLAN interface .
The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to themeasured values, device status information is also displayed and allows users to monitor
the status of the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network
parameters can be configured.
Access to the network is required for the Ethernet-APL connection.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.

210

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

Supported functions
Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook for example) and themeasuring device:• Upload the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration
backup)• Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration)• Export event list (.csv file)• Export parameter settings (.csv file or PDF file, document the measuring point
configuration)• Export the Heartbeat verification log (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat
Verification" application package)• Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for instance• Download driver for system integration• Visualize up to 1000 saved measured values (only available with the Extended
HistoROM application package →  214)
Web server special documentation →  217

HistoROM
data management

The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management
comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making
operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient.
When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored
as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated
data record, for example after commissioning.
Additional information on the data storage concept

There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device:
Available data

HistoROM backup

T-DAT

S-DAT

• Event logbook such as diagnostic eventsfor example• Parameter data record backup• Device firmware package• Driver for system integration forexporting via Web server, e.g:
GSDML for PROFINET• Measured value logging ("Extended
HistoROM" order option)• Current parameter data record (usedby firmware at run time)• Peakhold indicator (min/max values)• Totalizer values• Sensor data: nominal diameter etc.
• Serial number• Calibration data
• Device configuration (e.g. SW options,
fixed I/O or multi I/O)

Attachable to the user interface board in
the connection compartment

In the sensor plug in the transmitter neckpart

Storage location Fixed on the user interface board in theconnection compartment

Data backup
Automatic• The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the
DAT modules• If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing theprevious device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for
operation again immediately without any errors• If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data aretransferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is readyfor operation again immediately without any errors• If exchanging the electronics module (e.g. I/O electronics module): Once the electronics
module has been replaced, the software of the module is compared against the current
device firmware. The module software is upgraded or downgraded where necessary. The
electronics module is available for use immediately afterwards and no compatibility
problems occur.

Endress+Hauser

211

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

ManualAdditional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device
memory HistoROM backup for:• Data backup function
Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory
HistoROM backup• Data comparison function
Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in
the device memory HistoROM backup
Data transmission
Manual• Transfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of thespecific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate theconfiguration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes)• Transmission of the drivers for system integration via Web server, e.g.:
GSDML for PROFINET
Event list
Automatic• Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100
event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text
description and remedial measures• The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating
tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server
Data logging
ManualIf the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled:• Record up to 1 000 measured values via 1 to 4 channels• User configurable recording interval• Record up to 250 measured values via each of the 4 memory channels• Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or web server

16.12 Certificates and approvals
Current certificates and approvals that are available for the product can be selected via the
Product Configurator at www.endress.com:

CE mark

1.

Select the product using the filters and search field.

2.

Open the product page.

3.

Select Configuration.

The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable EU Directives. These are listed in
the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity along with the standards applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

UKCA marking

212

The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable UK regulations (Statutory
Instruments). These are listed in the UKCA Declaration of Conformity along with thedesignated standards. By selecting the order option for UKCA marking, Endress+Hauser
confirms a successful evaluation and testing of the device by affixing the UKCA mark.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

Contact address Endress+Hauser UK:
Endress+Hauser Ltd.
Floats Road
Manchester M23 9NF
United Kingdom
www.uk.endress.com
Ex approval

The devices are certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety instructions areprovided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference is made to thisdocument on the nameplate.

Certification PROFINET
with Ethernet-APL

PROFINET interface

Radio approval

The measuring device is certified and registered by the PNO (PROFIBUS
Nutzerorganisation e.V. / PROFIBUS User Organization). The measuring system meets all
the requirements of the following specifications:• Certified according to:• Test specification for PROFINET devices• PROFINET PA Profile 4• PROFINET Netload Robustness Class 2 10 Mbps
• APL conformance test
• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers(interoperability)• The device supports PROFINET S2 system redundancy.
The measuring device has radio approval.
For detailed information on the radio approval, see the Special Documentation

Pressure Equipment
Directive• With the marking:a) PED/G1/x (x = category) orb) UK/G1/x (x = category)on the sensor nameplate, Endress+Hauser confirms compliance with the "Essential
Safety Requirements"a) specified in Annex I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU orb) Schedule 2 of Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1105.
• Devices not bearing this marking (without PED or UKCA) are designed andmanufactured according to sound engineering practice. They meet the requirements ofa) Art. 4 Para. 3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU orb) Part 1, Para. 8 of Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1105.
The scope of application is indicateda) in diagrams 6 to 9 in Annex II of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU orb) Schedule 3, Para. 2 of Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1105.

Additional certification

PWIS-free
PWIS = paint-wetting impairment substances
Order code for "Service":• Option HC: PWIS-free (version A)• Option HD: PWIS-free (version B)• Option HE: PWIS-free (version C)
For more information on PWIS-free certification, see "Test specification" document
TS01028D

Endress+Hauser

213

Technical data

Other standards andguidelines

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL• EN 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)• EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratoryuse - general requirements• IEC/EN 61326-2-3
Emission in accordance with Class A requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
requirements).
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control
equipment• NAMUR NE 32
Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments withmicroprocessors• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitterswith analog output signal.
• NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics• NAMUR NE 105
Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices• NAMUR NE 107
Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices• NAMUR NE 131
Requirements for field devices for standard applications• ETSI EN 300 328
Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components.
• EN 301489
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM).

16.13 Application packages
Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of thedevice. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application
requirements.
The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently fromEndress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from yourlocal Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website:www.endress.com.
Diagnostic functionality

Order code for "Application package", option EA "Extended HistoROM"
Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of the measured
value memory.
Event log:
Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to 100
entries.
Data logging (line recorder):• Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated.
• 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The recording
interval can be defined and configured by the user.
• Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g. FieldCare,
DeviceCare or Web server.
For detailed information, see the Operating Instructions for the device.

214

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Heartbeat Technology

Technical data

Order code for "Application package", option EB "Heartbeat Verification + Monitoring"
Heartbeat Verification
Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter 7.6 a)"Control of monitoring and measuring equipment".
• Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process.
• Traceable verification results on request, including a report.
• Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces.
• Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within theframework of manufacturer specifications.
• Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment.
Heartbeat Monitoring
Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, to an
external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive maintenance orprocess analysis. These data enable the operator to:• Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact theprocess influences (e.g. formation of buildup, magnetic field interference etc.) have on
measuring performance over time.
• Schedule servicing in time.
• Monitor the process or product quality.
For detailed information, see the Special Documentation for the device.

Cleaning

Order code for "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning "The electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) function has been developed to have a solution for
applications where magnetite (Fe3O4) deposits frequently occur (e.g. hot water). Since
magnetite is highly conductive this build up leads to measuring errors and ultimately tothe loss of signal. The application package is designed to avoid build-up of very conductive
matter and thin layers (typical of magnetite).
For detailed information, see the Operating Instructions for the device.

16.14 Accessories
Overview of accessories available for order →  184

16.15 Supplementary documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number from thenameplate• Endress+Hauser Operations app: Enter serial number from nameplate or scanmatrix code on nameplate.
Standard documentation

Brief Operating Instructions

Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline Promag P

KA01290D

Endress+Hauser

215

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Brief Operating Instructions for transmitter
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline 300

KA01516D

Technical Information
Measuring device

Documentation code

Promag P 300

TI01224D

Description of Device Parameters
Measuring device

Documentation code

Promag 300

GP01172D

Supplementary devicedependent documentation

Safety instructions
Safety instructions for electrical equipment for hazardous areas.

Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex d/Ex de

XA01414D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01514D

cCSAus XP

XA01515D

cCSAus Ex d/ Ex de

XA01516D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01517D

INMETRO Ex d/Ex de

XA01518D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01519D

NEPSI Ex d/Ex de

XA01520D

NEPSI Ex nA

XA01521D

EAC Ex d/Ex de

XA01656DEAC Ex nA

XA01657DJPN Ex d

XA01775D

Remote display and operating module DKX001
Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex i

XA01494D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01498D

cCSAus IS

XA01499D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01513D

INMETRO Ex i

XA01500D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01501D

NEPSI Ex i

XA01502D

NEPSI Ex nA

XA01503D

216

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Technical data

Special Documentation
Contents

Documentation code

Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive

SD01614D

Radio approvals for WLAN interface for A309/A310 display module

SD01793D

Web server

SD02768D

Remote display and operating module DKX001

SD01763D

Contents

Documentation code

Heartbeat Technology

SD02729D

Web server

SD02768D

Installation Instructions
Contents

Comment

Installation instructions for spare part sets andaccessories• Access the overview of all the available spare part sets via Device Viewer →  182• Accessories available for order with Installation Instructions →  184

Endress+Hauser

217

Index

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Index
A

Access authorization to parameters
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Additional certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Operating height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Relative humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Ambient temperature
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 200
Analog Output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

B

Binary Input module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Binary Output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

C

Cable entries
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cable entry
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 212
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Certification PROFINET with Ethernet-APL . . . . . . . 213
Check
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Checklist
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cleaning
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 35
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting the signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting the supply voltage cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connection
see Electrical connection
Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Context menu
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
218

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

D

Date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 16
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 133
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 201
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Device master file
GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Device nameSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Device revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Device type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Diagnostic behavior
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Diagnostic information
Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 153
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Diagnostics
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
DIP switch
see Write protection switch
Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Direct access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Displaysee Local display
Display and operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . . . 209
Display area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Display values
For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Document
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Document information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

E

ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 60
Electrical connection
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operating tools
Via APL network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
RSLogix 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Enabling/disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Endress+Hauser services
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Environment
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Error messages
see Diagnostic messages
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Extended order code
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

F

Field of application
Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
FirmwareRelease date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fitted electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Endress+Hauser

Index

Function scope
SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Functionssee Parameters

G

Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

H

Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Heavy sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Help text
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

I

Identifying the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Influence
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Inlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Inspection
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Installation conditions
Heavy sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

L

Languages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Line recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
see Diagnostic message
see In alarm condition
see Operational display
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

M

Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Measured values
Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
see Process variables
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

219

Index

Measuring device
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Integrating via communication protocol . . . . . . . . 80
Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mounting the ground cable/ground disks . . . . . 27
Mounting the seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Screw tightening torques, maximum . . . . . . . . 28
Screw tightening torques, nominal . . . . . . . . . . 30
Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Measuring tube specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Menu
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 93
Menus
For measuring device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
ModuleAnalog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Binary Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Totalizer
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Totalizer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Volume Totalizer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mounting dimensions
see Dimensions
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mounting requirements
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Mounting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

N

NameplateSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Navigation view
In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
220

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

O

Onsite display
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 150
Operating height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Operating keys
see Operating elements
Operating menu
Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 16
Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Output variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

P

Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Parameter
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Entering values or text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Parameter settings
Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
APL port (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Build-up index adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Build-up index adjustment (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Configure flow damping (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Data logging (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Electrode cleaning cycle (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . 125
Empty pipe detection (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Heartbeat base settings (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . 126
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Network diagnostics (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Process variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105, 108
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 139
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Sensor adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Service interface (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Status input 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Totalizer (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 139
Volume flow (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
WLAN settings (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Pressure Equipment Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Process conditions
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

RRadio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Remedial measures
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Endress+Hauser

Index

Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Replacement
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

S

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SensorMounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 16
Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Settings
Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Empty pipe detection (EPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Resetting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Show data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Status area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 152
Storage concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
221

IndexStorage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Structure
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Submenu
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129
Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 118
Analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
APL port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Electrode cleaning cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Heartbeat base settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Heartbeat setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Network diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 139
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Service interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Symbols
Controlling data entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
For wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
222

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
System design
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
see Measuring device design
System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
System redundancy S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

T

Technical data, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Temperature range
Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 208
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tool
For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tool tipsee Help text
Tools
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Totalizer
Assign process variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Totalizer Control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Totalizer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Transmitter
Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Troubleshooting
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Turning the electronics housing
see Turning the transmitter housing
Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

U

UKCA marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Use of the measuring device
Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
see Intended use
User interface
Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

V

Version data for the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Volume module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Volume Totalizer Control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

W

W@M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 182
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFINET with Ethernet-APL

Index

W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
WeightTransport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
WizardBuild-up index adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configure flow damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Empty pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . 104, 105, 108
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Write protection
Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Endress+Hauser

223

*71598576*
71598576

www.addresses.endress.com